JP2023090975A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can make a game progress preferable.SOLUTION: A slot machine 10 starts rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41 after a bet operation. Operations of stop switches 42-44 then stop respective reels, a stop symbol combination according to a lottery result is stopped, and a put-out of medals is carried out. For example, the bet operation is carried out by an operation of a first credit operation switch 56 or a second credit input switch 57, and its bet number is displayed on a bet display 34. After a specific re-game result, a different bet operation is carried out between in the case in which the first credit operation switch 56 is operated and in the case in which the second credit input switch 57 is operated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to optimize the progress of the game in the gaming machines exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the progress of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means for performing a start operation for starting orbiting each of the orbiting bodies;
a stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. drive control means for executing
a bet amount operation means for performing a bet amount operation for setting a game bet amount;
bet amount setting means for setting a game bet amount based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for awarding a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
A bet amount for which a specific notification is performed when the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means is performed, and a bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set based on the bet amount operation is performed by the specific notification means. a notification means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the number of bets drawn by the lottery means for the replay result. re-game setting means for executing a re-game process in which the player can again receive a lottery by the lottery means in a re-game state in which the same number of bets is set;
with
a first bet amount operating means and a second bet amount operating means as the bet amount operating means;
First specific notification means capable of executing the specific notification in a first notification mode based on the bet amount operation of the first bet amount operation means when the re-game processing is performed based on a specific re-game result and,
When the re-game processing is performed based on the specific re-game result, the specific notification is performed in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode based on the bet amount operation of the second bet amount operation means. a second specific notification means capable of executing
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to optimize the progress of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flow chart which shows AT mode lottery processing for normal. 10 is a flowchart showing AT mode lottery processing for CZ. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of precursor mode. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of an immediate notification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a CZ mode game number table and an omen effect game number table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first game number management process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second number-of-games management process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing advantageous section transition game processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an overview of display mode transition relationships; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a game state display section and a bet display section; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing BET processing; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a replay setting process. It is a flow chart which shows medal insertion correspondence processing. 9 is a flowchart showing first operation corresponding processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second operation handling processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for game state display parts. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a single bet effect setting process; 11 is a flow chart showing continuous bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flow chart showing replay state bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal regame bet effect setting process; 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo bet effect is restricted; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo bet effect is restricted; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing standby state setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows processing for waiting. 4 is a timing chart for explaining a temporary standby state and a standby state; 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo bet effect is restricted in Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 14 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the starting effect and the pseudo-bet effect in Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing of the pressing order notification effect; FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a specific replay bet effect setting process in Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the pseudo-bet effect and the freeze effect; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows freeze lottery processing. 14 is a timing chart for explaining a pseudo-bet effect according to the type of bet operation in Modification 4. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 19 is a flowchart showing standby state setting processing in Modification 5. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for waiting. 4 is a timing chart for explaining a temporary standby state and a standby state; 29 is a flowchart showing medal return processing in Modification 6. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows production|presentation processing at the time of return. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between credit settlement and pseudo-bet effects; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a specific regame bet effect setting process in Modification 7. FIG.

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are individually driven by the stepping motor to rotate independently. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, a combination of each symbol stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, or the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an active line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor win is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor win is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the lines where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be recognized. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red clam" symbol or "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "white 7" symbol and "white shell" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been won.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins, in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege given according to the game results. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. Winning will be established. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the symbols "BAR" are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b). As shown, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5. When the second replay win is established, the game state does not shift, but the game shifts to an information mode advantageous to the player, and the first AT state as a so-called pseudo bonus is started.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the “Bell” symbol, the “Ark shell” symbol or the “Senior” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Bell” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when it stops at the top. When the symbols corresponding to the third replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 14(d). As shown in the figure, the "red 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right downward line L4. When the third replay win is established, the game state does not shift, but the game shifts to an information mode advantageous to the player, and the second AT state as a so-called pseudo bonus is started.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper stage watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that a so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stop on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game win or the 12th re-game win stops on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB win is won. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB winning are stopped on the activated line ML, the white 7 symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

When the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``BAR'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB win is won. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning is stopped on the activated line ML, the "WHITE 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The "red 7" pattern stops in the middle row.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotary plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. 56 is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, if there is no specified number of credits, virtual medals are inserted as many as the credits. For example, when the specific number is set to three and the credit is two, two virtual medals are inserted.

A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 together with the medal insertion port 45 constitute input means for inputting game media. Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

The first credit insertion switch 56 is provided with a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for detecting that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated. A second credit insertion detection sensor 57a is provided to detect that the two-credit insertion switch 57 has been operated, and the credit insertion detection sensors 56a and 57a detect the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57. (See FIG. 15). The first credit input switch 56 also incorporates a first credit lamp 56b. The first credit lamp 56b is configured to be switchable between a lit state and an extinguished state, and the operation of the first credit input switch 56 is prompted by turning on the first credit lamp 56b. Instead of or in addition to the lighting state in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operable, a flashing state may be employed.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition in which the virtual medals are stored, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the payment switch 59 constitutes a payment operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An indication monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the winning rate of small wins is changed and the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R in the game panel 25 and to the left of the credit display section 60, operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 and medal insertion into the medal insertion slot 45 are displayed. A BET display section 75 as a first display section for displaying the number of bets for the game set by inserting, and a game state display section 76 for showing the current state of progress of the game are provided.

A bet display section 34 is provided as a second display section for displaying the number of bets in the above game on the left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 . Furthermore, on the right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, it is displayed that there is a waiting state (wait state) until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the start of the game. A weight display section 35 is provided for notification.

The BET display portion 75, the gaming state display portion 76, the bet display portion 34, and the weight display portion 35 will be described later in detail.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. A settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized driving voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the driving voltage drops below 10 volts. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit Information is displayed on the display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the BET display unit 75, the gaming state display unit 76, the role ratio monitor 77, the display control device 81, the hall management device (not shown), and the like. are connected via the input/output port 104 to an external centralized terminal board 121 or the like capable of transmitting .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. , a standby storage area 106c for storing the state before shifting to the demonstration state, and a backup area.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), is connected to the main control device 101 on the input side, and is connected to the bet display section 34, the weight display section 35, the first credit lamp 56b, the first credit lamp 56b and the output side. An upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display section 65 are connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the bet display section 34, the weight display section 35, the first credit lamp 56b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, BET processing is performed.

In the BET processing, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing is performed to automatically insert the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

In the process of automatically inserting virtual medals, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, if any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay wins have been established, processing for setting the number of bets is performed based on the number of bet operations such as the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 and the insertion of medals from the medal insertion port 45 . The BET processing will be described later in detail.

In the subsequent step S205, it is checked whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing. At the same time, abnormal processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After executing the abnormality processing, in step S206, medal return processing for paying out the same number of medals as the virtual medals credited based on the operation of the settlement switch 59 is performed.

After executing the medal return process, in step S207, as a result of the BET process in step S204, the number of bet medals has reached the prescribed number, and the start operation for starting the game can be accepted. Determine whether or not there is In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S207 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S207. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S207. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number and the game is not ready to start, the process returns to step S204 for BET processing.

If it is in a startable state, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated to perform a start operation. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the BET processing of step S204.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, processing for the game state display section is executed. This process is for controlling the display of the game state display section 76 based on the game start operation, and the details thereof will be described later together with the description of the game state display section 76 .

In the following step S210, an effective line setting process is performed to set a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S211, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S212, reel control processing in step S213, medal payout processing in step S214, and standby state setting processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the current game state is the normal game state, the normal game state lottery table is selected. When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 21). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and a combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value about 18.4 times, respectively. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. By the way, in the 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (winning when IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning winning combination are displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even when the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, setting of the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning will be performed. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor combination and the 1st When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established preferentially over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, after executing the section display first process in step S314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S213 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined specific period of wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. Wait until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won at the push order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, a minor winning combination may be established, or none of the minor winning combinations may be established and may be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, a winning result handling process is executed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S214 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the processing of storing the information of the winning re-game results is performed, End the medal payout process. In addition, in the BET process (step S204), a process of automatically placing a bet based on the replay win is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . Further, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step S414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games, in a situation where two or three are set as the prescribed number of games, the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, A two-bet game is permitted by inserting two medals from the medal slot 45 . If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "46" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "46" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the subsequent step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "2" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when two or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/9.02, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.78. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/3.13. In this case, a reduction of about 0.96 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 0.96 medals).

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rate of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/9.03, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/9.03, and even in the 2-bet game, the second BB state is more likely to win than the normal game state. is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1BB state and the 2nd BB state, since a lottery table is used in which the number of medals can be decreased in each game, even if the 1BB state or the 2BB state is completed, the number of medals held will not increase. Conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will be reduced by completing the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, in the second BB state, the common bell is won, and 13 coins are paid out when the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established. It is as follows.

If it is determined in step S517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step S518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step S521, after setting the prescribed bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so that the 2-bet game can be easily played. By the way, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are over, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56. It is necessary to insert three medals from the medal slot 45 .

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

In the initial state in which the RAM 106 is initialized (cleared), the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are not set, and the game is in a normal game state (non-internal state) in which neither BB is won. be. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a two bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the winning of the second BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the carry-over state (internal state) in which the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for medal increase. Also, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the push-order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the small combination to be won differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 . In other words, compared to the first BB state and the second BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase/decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 25) of winning the 1st to 6th small wins when the bell is won in the pressing order. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game in which the 1st credit input switch 56 is operated is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the 2nd BB prize won cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB win is carried over, neither the 1st BB win nor the 2nd BB win occurs. The game will continue in this state.

In the slot machine 10, the 1st BB winning flag is stored in the normal area of the various flags storage area 106d, while the 2nd BB winning flag is stored in the storage area of the various flags storage area 106d. It is configured to be The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags for other winning combinations are stored. Each flag stored in the normal area is stored and held by backup power or the like even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (even if the power is turned off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall is closed, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 is started while various flags stored in the normal area are stored, and the first BB is won. Even if the power is turned ON/OFF with the flag set, the slot machine 10 is started with the first BB winning flag set. However, when the winning probability setting process is started when the slot machine 10 is started up (when the setting is changed), the initialization process (clearing process) of the normal area is performed. Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the first BB winning flag is cleared together with other flags stored in the normal area.

On the other hand, the storage area is an area in which only the 2nd BB winning flag is stored. Similar to the normal area described above, the flags stored in the storage area are not cleared when the power is turned on/off. Furthermore, in the storage area, even if the winning probability setting process is started when the slot machine 10 is started up, the initialization process of the storage area is not performed (it is excluded from the initialization process). ). Therefore, even if the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is held (stored) without being cleared. In other words, when the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the first BB winning flag in which the first BB winning flag is stored, the first BB winning flag is cleared and started as a non-internal state. When the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the second BB winning in which the second BB winning flag is stored, the second BB winning flag is not cleared and the game is started in the internal state of the second BB winning. be. By doing so, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over can be continued not only when the slot machine 10 is turned ON/OFF, but also when the setting is changed.

Then, in order to play the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over, basically, when the slot machine 10 is shipped from the factory, the game should be played until the winning of the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. , the second BB winning is stored and held until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clearing process is performed. By doing so, it is possible to favorably carry out the game in a state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the second BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in step S601, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. More specifically, either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, or the non-internal state (normal game state) before the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, or the internal state after the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won. (carried over state) or not. In the 1BB state and the 2BB state, 3 is set as the prescribed number (regular bet number), and in the non-internal state before winning the 1BB or 2BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1BB or 2BB 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed number (regular bet number). Then, in step S602, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is one prescribed number (specific prescribed number) prescribed in the state grasped in step S601. In this embodiment, the specific prescribed number of the first BB state and the second BB state is 3. In this case, the prescribed number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is 3. Therefore, in step S601, the first BB If it is determined to be the state or the second BB state, an affirmative determination is always made in step S602. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in states other than the first BB state and the second BB state, 3 out of the prescribed number of 2 and 3 is set as the specific prescribed number, and other than the first BB state and the second BB state. If the number of bets is 3 in the state of , an affirmative determination is made in step S602. In this case, processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S603 is performed. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 2 in a state other than the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S603 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, the internal state can be played in the 3-bet game, and the normal game in which the second BB is carried over can be facilitated. In addition, the specific prescribed number of the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 2, and in the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is always made in step S602 so that the processing for the display mode is not performed. may

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section shift lottery process is executed in step S604, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 33, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 33, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result grasped in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether or not an AT mode winning flag or an AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning a lottery for shifting to the AT mode, and the AT mode flag is a flag that is set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step S605, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or has been completed. If none of the flags have been set in step S605 and the transition to the AT mode has not yet been determined, an AT lottery process is executed in step S606. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S605, AT addition processing is executed in step S607.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step S606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, subtraction processing of the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the maximum number of games (ceiling number of games) that can be played without causing a transition to the AT mode in the advantageous section. A predetermined lottery value is input to the ceiling counter at the time of transition to the advantageous section. Note that the maximum value of the ceiling counter is set to 999 in this embodiment. That is, by playing a maximum of 999 games after shifting to the advantageous section, the shift to the AT mode occurs even if the AT mode shift lottery is not won. In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter is executed. Then, in step S802, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero. If not 0, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S803 to S805.

That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not any one of the first CZ mode flag, the second CZ mode flag, and the third CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, the normal mode and the CZ mode are provided as states before winning the lottery for the transition to the AT mode, which is an advantageous section, and the CZ mode wins the lottery for the transition to the AT mode rather than the normal mode. It is set as an easy mode. As the CZ mode, a first CZ mode, a second CZ mode, and a third CZ mode with different transition triggers are set. This is a flag for distinction. If it is determined in step S803 that one of the CZ mode flags is not set, normal AT mode lottery processing is executed in step S804, and one of the CZ mode flags is set in step S803. If so, AT mode lottery processing for CZ is executed in step S805.

In the normal AT mode lottery process at step S804, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Then, in step S902, a normal AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 33, in the ordinary AT mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition rate (AT mode transition lottery winning probability) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 33, normal AT mode shift lottery triggers include normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the normal AT mode transition lottery.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S902, a process of acquiring random numbers for AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S903. Then, in step S904, after the AT mode transition lottery is executed, the AT mode lottery process ends. That is, in the ordinary AT mode lottery process, an AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the lottery results of each game.

On the other hand, in the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the lottery results of a plurality of games during the CZ mode.

That is, in the AT mode lottery process for CZ in step S805, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Then, in step S1002, a process of acquiring a point table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 33, the point table is set so that the point value obtained in the current game may differ depending on the lottery result of each game. If there is, 20 points are obtained, and if the lottery result of this game is Cherry B, which is harder to win than Cherry A, 50 points are obtained. Lower results are set to get more points.

Then, in step S1003, a process of adding the point value obtained in the current game to the cumulative counter RC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. In the present embodiment, the lottery result command of each game is set to include the information of the cumulative counter RC, and the value of the cumulative counter RC is grasped on the display control device 81 side together with the lottery result of each game. It is possible.

In the subsequent step S1004, a process of grasping the CZ counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed in the CZ mode. Then, in step S1005, a process of acquiring an AT mode transition lottery table for CZ from the various table storage area 105a is executed, and in step S1006, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, and then an AT mode lottery process for CZ is executed. finish.

As shown in FIG. 34, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the product of a predetermined number set according to the value of the CZ counter and the value of the cumulative counter RC and the cumulative counter RC is set as the winning probability (%) of the AT mode transition lottery. When the CZ counter is 16 or more, the predetermined number is set to 0.1 when the cumulative counter RC is 0 to 59, and is set to 0.6 when the cumulative counter RC is 80 to 100. be. In this case, if the CZ counter is 16 or more and the cumulative counter RC is 30, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 3% by multiplying the predetermined number (0.1) by the cumulative counter RC (30). Become. Also, if the CZ counter is 16 or more and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 54% by multiplying the predetermined number (0.6) by the cumulative counter RC (90). . When the CZ counter is 3 to 1, the predetermined number is set to 0.5 when the cumulative counter RC is 0 to 9, and 1.0 when the cumulative counter RC is 50 to 100. is set as In this case, if the CZ counter is 3 to 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 5, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 3% by multiplying the predetermined number (0.6) by the cumulative counter RC (5). becomes. Further, if the CZ counter is 3 to 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 90% by multiplying the predetermined number (1.0) by the cumulative counter RC (90). Become.

That is, in the CZ mode of the present embodiment, the larger the point value obtained in each game in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery, and the fewer the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the more likely the AT mode transition lottery will be won. It is designed to make it easier to win. Even if the point value obtained in each game in the CZ mode is large, it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is large. In this way, it is suppressed that the AT mode transition lottery is won early after the shift to the CZ mode, and the game (effect) in the CZ mode is increased while increasing the attention to the lottery results of each game in the CZ mode. ) is devised to keep you entertained until the end.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after executing the AT mode lottery process in step S804 or step S805, in step S806, the AT mode transition lottery in the AT mode lottery process of step S804 or step S805 is won. Determine whether or not If the game has been won, the AT mode winning process of steps S807 to S810 is executed, and if the game has not been won, the AT mode non-winning process of steps S811 to S819 is executed.

That is, if the AT mode shift lottery is won, first, in step S807, the precursor mode setting process is executed. Note that even when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in step S802, the flow advances to step S807 to perform the precursor mode setting process. The portent mode is a situation in which a shift to the AT mode can occur in the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 when a shift to the AT mode can occur, such as by winning an AT mode shift lottery. This is a mode that performs a sign production that suggests that something has happened. In step S807, a process of setting the number of games in the portent mode, etc., is performed in response to a situation in which a shift to the AT mode may occur.

That is, in the precursor mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. to run. Then, in step S1103, the process of acquiring the prompt notification lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed, and in step S1104, the immediate notification lottery process is executed. In the immediate notification lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the notification of the situation in which the shift to the AT mode may occur without going through the above-mentioned premonition effect.

As shown in FIG. 35, the prompt notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the instant notification lottery differs according to the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the smaller the value of the CZ counter, that is, the smaller the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the instant notification lottery, and the larger the value of the cumulative counter RC, that is, the value of points acquired during the CZ mode. It is set so that the larger the number, the easier it is to win the immediate notification lottery. In the case where the CZ counter is 0 and the player wins the AT mode transition in the normal mode, the instant notification lottery is won with a probability of 100% in the present embodiment.

In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the immediate notification lottery in step S1104 has been won. If the prompt notification lottery is not won, the process for the omen mode is performed in steps S1106 to S1113, and if the immediate notification lottery is won, the AT mode notification process is performed in steps S1114 to S1119. conduct.

If the instant notification lottery has not been won, in step S1106, it is determined whether or not the situation in which the AT mode shift lottery was won was in the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode among the CZ modes. If the mode is the second CZ mode instead of the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode, lottery processing for the number of portent effect games is executed in step S1107. Then, in step S1108, a process of inputting a value obtained by adding the result of the lottery in step S1107 and the current CZ counter (the number of remaining games in the CZ mode) to an omen counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. do. The premonition counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games from when a situation in which a shift to the AT mode can occur until notification of the situation (AT win notification effect) is performed.

In the lottery process for the number of omen effect games in step S1107, the number of omen effect games table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current number of omen effect games is set at random. As shown in FIG. 36, the portent effect game number table is set so that one of 13 games to 15 games is selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games. For example, if 14 games are selected in the portent effect game count lottery process and the remaining number of games in the CZ mode is 3 games, 17 is input to the portent counter, and a transition to the AT mode can occur. After 17 games have passed (after the AT mode win flag is set), the notification to that effect will be made.

After executing the precursor counter input process in step S1108, in step S1109, the process of setting the precursor flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. Then, in step S1110, the process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the port mode setting process ends. The portent flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the portent mode has been set, and the portent command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the portent mode has been set. be. In addition, the portent command includes the value of the portent counter, and the display control device 81 grasps the game for which notification of the situation in which the transition to the AT mode is possible has occurred, from the value of the portent counter. becomes possible. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the portent command is received will be described later in detail.

If it is the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode in step S1106, it is determined whether it is the first CZ mode in step S1111. A process of inputting the value obtained by adding the predetermined number (5) to the precursor counter is executed. Also, if it is determined in step S1111 that the current mode is not the first CZ mode but the third CZ mode, then in step S1113 a process of inputting the value of the CZ counter to the precursor counter is executed. After executing the precursor flag setting process in step S1109 and the precursor command setting process in step S1110, the precursor mode setting process ends. In this case, in the first CZ mode, a predetermined number of games are executed after the number of remaining games in the first CZ mode becomes 0, and in the third CZ mode, the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode becomes 0, notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery is made.

In other words, the number of games until notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the type of CZ mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the first CZ mode is less than the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode. A notification is made to the effect that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won based on the number of games played. The reason for such a configuration will be explained in detail when explaining the contents of the presentation during the CZ mode.

If it is determined in step S1105 that the immediate notification lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1114. In step S1114, a process of clearing the CZ counter to 0 is executed. Thereafter, in step S1105, AT type determination processing is performed to determine whether the current AT mode type is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. In the present embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode are set as the AT mode, and the second AT mode and the first AT mode have different additional performances in the AT mode (probability of winning the additional lottery), and the second AT mode has better performance than the first AT mode. is excellent (it is set so that it is easy to win the additional lottery). In the AT type determination process of step S1115, for example, according to the setting value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, etc., or randomly, the AT mode type of this time is drawn Determined by

In step S1116, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode has been determined based on the processing result of step S1115. In the case of the first AT mode, in step S1117, the process of setting the notification flag for the first AT in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step S1118, the first AT winning immediate notification command is output to the display control device 81. After executing the setting process, the setting process of the precursor mode ends. The notification flag for the 1st AT is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first AT start number will appear on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the 1st AT mode is started, and is a 1st AT winning immediate notification command. is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the situation is such that a shift to the first AT mode may occur. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the 1st AT winning immediate notification command will be described later in detail.

If it is determined to be the second AT instead of the first AT in step S1116, a process of setting the notification flag for the second AT in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1119, and a second AT winning immediate notification command is executed in step S1120. as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the setting process of the portent mode ends. The notification flag for the second AT is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the numbers for the start of the second AT appear on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the second AT mode is started, and is a second AT winning immediate notification command. is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that a transition to the second AT mode is possible. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the second AT winning immediate notification command will also be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after the precursor mode setting process is executed in step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. If any CZ mode flag is set, in step S809, processing for clearing the set CZ mode flag is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S808, or after the process of step S809 is executed, the AT mode winning flag is set in step S810, and then the AT lottery process ends. By performing such processing, in the lottery result handling processing for the next game and subsequent games, affirmative determination is made in step S605.

If it is determined in step S806 that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it is determined in step S811 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. If none of the CZ mode flags are set and the mode is the normal mode, a lottery for switching to the CZ mode is performed in steps S812 to S819. On the other hand, if any CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated without performing the processes of steps S812 to S819.

That is, in step S812, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG provided in the various counter areas 106e is equal to or greater than a predetermined first predetermined value (31) and equal to or less than a predetermined second predetermined value (700). Determine whether or not The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games in the advantageous interval. If the number of games in the advantageous section AG is less than the first predetermined number or greater than the second predetermined number, the process for AT lottery ends without performing the lottery for transition to the CZ mode.

In this embodiment, the CZ mode may be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and the first predetermined number is set until the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode set at the time of the transition to the advantageous section is completed. It is set as a number larger than the number of games required for Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section becomes 0, thereby permitting the transition to the AT mode without going through the AT mode transition lottery. The second predetermined value is a value close to the upper limit value (999) of the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and more specifically, it is set to 700, which is 70% of the upper limit value.

In other words, when the advantageous section is consumed up to a value close to the upper limit of the ceiling counter, the lottery for transition to the CZ mode is not performed. The setting process of the ceiling counter will be described in detail later, but there are cases where a value smaller than the second predetermined value is set in the ceiling counter when transitioning to the advantageous section. In this case, a CZ mode transition lottery etc. It is allowed to reach the ceiling and shift to AT mode before reaching the upper limit number of games (700). In other words, even if a value smaller than the second predetermined value is input to the ceiling counter, the CZ mode transition lottery may be won just before reaching the ceiling.

In step S812, if the number of games AG in the advantageous section is within the range for performing the CZ mode transition lottery, etc., in step S813, a process of acquiring the CZ mode transition lottery table from the table storage area 105a is executed, and the process proceeds to step S814. CZ mode transition lottery processing is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 33, a transition rate to the CZ mode (probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. For example, if the lottery result of this game is Chance A, you win the CZ mode transition lottery with a probability of 7%, and if the lottery result of this game is Chance B, which is harder to win than Chance A. , 15% probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery, which is higher than in the case of Chance A, and so on. It is

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. In the case of non-winning, the process for AT lottery is ended as it is. If the CZ mode transition lottery has been won, in step S816, the second CZ mode game number lottery process is executed, and in step S817, the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter, and step At S818, processing for setting the second CZ mode flag is executed. That is, when the CZ mode transition lottery in the normal mode is won in the advantageous section, the second CZ mode is set, and the number of games is determined by the lottery processing in step S816. In the second CZ mode game number lottery process, the second CZ mode game number table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and the current number of games in the second CZ mode is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the second CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 8 games to 15 games is selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as games and 15 games are less likely to be selected. For example, when 10 games are selected in the second CZ mode number-of-games lottery process, 10 is input to the CZ counter in step S817.

After setting the second CZ mode flag in step S818, the process for setting the second CZ mode start command to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S819, and then the AT lottery process ends. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the second CZ mode start command will be described later in detail.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT add-on process is a process that is executed when the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous AT mode games.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1201, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in steps S1202 to S1208, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table corresponding to the current situation is executed. That is, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag has been set, and the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred since the transition to the AT mode is possible. If the situation is before the AT mode shift, an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, and it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The situation in which the first AT notification flag and the second AT notification flag are set is after the notification that the transition to the AT mode has already occurred (AT winning notification effect) has been executed. , and that the transition to the AT mode has not occurred. In other words, a situation in which neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is set in step S1203 is a situation in which a transition to the AT mode may occur, but notification to that effect has not yet been made. It means that it is in a situation where it is not done (precursor mode).

Therefore, when it is determined in step S1203 that neither the notification flag for the first AT nor the notification flag for the second AT is set, in step S1204, the lottery table before winning notification after winning is selected from various table storage areas 105a. If it is determined in step S1203 that any of the flags is set after the acquisition process is executed, then in step S12056 the process of acquiring the additional lottery table before transition after notification of winning is executed.

As shown in FIG. 38, comparing the addition lottery table before notification of winning after winning and the addition lottery table before transition after notification of winning, the addition lottery using the table before transition after notification of winning is more likely to be won after winning. It is set so that it is easier to win the addition lottery than the addition lottery using the pre-notification addition lottery table. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by the second chance B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before notification of winning after winning has a probability of 5%, whereas the additional lottery before transition after notification of winning is won. In the additional lottery using the table, the winning probability is 7%, and in the situation before shifting to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery after the notification of winning than before the notification of winning the AT mode.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1202, it means that the AT mode flag is set, and that the transition to the AT mode has already occurred. In this case, the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the current AT mode is the first AT mode. If it is the 1st AT mode, in step S1207, a process of acquiring the 1st AT additional lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed, and if it is the 2nd AT mode, in step S1208, from various table storage areas 105a A process of acquiring the second AT additional lottery table is executed.

As shown in FIG. 38, comparing the 1st AT extra lottery table and the 2nd AT extra lottery table, the extra lottery using the 2nd AT extra lottery table uses the 1st AT extra lottery table. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by Cherry B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the 1st AT wins with a probability of 10%, whereas the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the 2nd AT. In the lottery, the probability of winning is 20%, and in the situation after shifting to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery during the second AT mode than during the first AT mode.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in any one of steps S1204, S1205, S1207 and S1208, an additional lottery is executed in step S1209. Then, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the addition lottery is won, an addition game number lottery process is executed in step S1211. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 38, the add-on game number table is set so that the add-on game number differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. On the other hand, if Cherry A is used as a trigger, an average of 15 games will be added on average. It is set so that the number of additional games is larger in the case.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S1211, the process of adding the number of additional games this time to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1212. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. After executing the process of step S1212, after executing the process of setting the add-on command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1213, the AT add-on process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command executes a process for performing the add-on notification effect corresponding to the add-on by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27).

After the processing of step S606 or step S607 is executed, it is determined in step S608 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a first-place win. The push order is the result including the normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C in addition to the pushing order bell. Normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C are all the results of winning multiple replays, and the replay that establishes a prize may differ depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39, the normal replay A basically sets the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M; 32R stop control is performed. On the other hand, the normal Lip B and the normal Lip C are arranged so that when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M from each reel 32L, 32M, 32M 32R is controlled to stop, and when the left stop switch 42 or middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop so that the first regame win is established. . However, in these normal replays A, normal replays B, and normal replays C, even if any of the replay winning replays that are duplicately won are established, the benefits granted are replays, and replays that are established Only the type of game is different. In other words, the normal replay A, normal replay B, and normal replay C are game results in which replay winnings are established regardless of the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop numbers differ depending on the operating order. In particular, the normal reply B and the normal reply C are the triggers for the start of the AT mode, and after the AT mode winning flag is set, the notification to the effect that the transition to the AT mode may occur was performed. After that, after the first AT mode is started in a game in which the second replay winning prize can be established, and after the AT mode win flag is set, a notification is made to the effect that a transition to the AT mode may occur. , the second AT mode is started in a game in which the third replay winning can be established. That is, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the above notification (AT winning notification effect) is executed, and even after the above notification is executed. However, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until a game in which the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize can be established.

If it is determined in step S608 that the first hand has been won, it is determined in step S609 whether or not any of the CZ mode flag, AT mode winning flag, or AT mode flag is set. If any one of these flags is set, the pressing order notification process is executed in step S610, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S608 or step S609, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification process executed in step S610, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 40(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is established when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous section and a push order informing can occur is established. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which it is easy for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the pushing order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who progresses the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop button in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Processing for notification of pressing order>
Next, the pressing order notification process executed in step S610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to third CZ mode flags is set. If none of the first to third CZ mode flags have been set, it is determined in step S1302 whether or not the AT mode winning flag has been set. When the first to third CZ mode flags are not set and the AT mode winning flag is set, it means that the AT mode has not yet been switched to after winning the AT mode. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the AT mode winning flag is set but these AT notification flags are not set, it means that although the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the prediction mode is still on. In this case, in the current game, no push order notification is generated, and the push order notification process is terminated. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply B or normal reply C. In the case of the normal reply A or the push order bell instead of the normal reply B and the normal reply C, the main push order informing process is terminated as it is. If it is either normal reply B or normal reply C, it is determined whether or not it is normal reply B in step S1305. If it is normal reply B, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not the first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the normal reply B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, the process advances to step S1307 to execute processing for starting the first AT mode.

That is, in step S1307, the first AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1308, the first AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first AT mode will start from the current game. After that, in step S1309, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the second regame winning is performed. Then, in step S1310, after executing the process of setting the push order command including the information of the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning as an output object to the display control device 81, the main push order notification process is executed. exit. When the display control device 81 receives this pressing order command, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second replay winning prize is the pressing order notification effect of the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, or "Aim from the right! !”, voice navigation, etc. are performed, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning are notified.

If it is determined in step S1305 that the normal reply is not the normal reply B but the normal reply C, the process advances to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set instead of the second AT notification flag, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the normal reply C is won and the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1312 to execute processing for starting the second AT mode.

That is, in step S1312, the second AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step S1313, a second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second AT mode will start from the current game. After that, in step S1314, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the third regame winning is performed. Then, in step S1315, after executing the process of setting the push order command including the information of the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning as an output object to the display control device 81, the main push order notification process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order command displays, as the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay winning, a pressing order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, or "Aim from the right! !”, voice navigation, etc. are performed, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third re-game are announced.

If it is determined in step S1301 that any CZ mode flag has been set, or if the AT mode winning flag has not been set in step S1301 and the AT mode is already in progress, the process advances to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the push order bell. If it is not the push order bell, the push order informing process is terminated. If it is the push order bell, it is determined in step S1317 whether any CZ mode flag is set. If any CZ mode flag has been set, it is determined in step S1318 whether or not a notified flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The notification completion flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the notification of the pressing order when winning the pressing order bell has already been performed in the CZ mode. ) are cleared. If the notification completion flag is set, the pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the notified flag is not set, a process of setting the notified flag is executed in step S1319.

If the AT mode flag instead of the CZ mode flag is set at step S1317, or after the processing at step S1319 is executed, at step S1320, according to the type of the current pressing order bell, the first minor winning prize is won. to control the instruction monitor 68 so as to notify the pressing order corresponding to the winning of the 6th minor combination. Then, in step S1321, after executing a process of setting a push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81, The actual pressing order notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the pressing order command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the CZ mode, AT mode, or the like is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1401, a process of grasping the current gaming state is performed, and in step S1402, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the current game is a specific prescribed number defined in the state grasped in step S1401. make a judgment as to whether This process corresponds to steps S601 and S602, and if it is determined in step S1402 that the specified number is not reached, the process for dealing with winning results is terminated without performing the processes after step S1403. If the number of bets is the specific prescribed number corresponding to the state, the process proceeds to step S1403.

A first number-of-games management process is executed in step S1403, and a second number-of-games management process is executed in step S1404. The first number-of-games management process is mainly for managing the number of games played in CZ mode, omen mode, etc., before shifting to the AT mode. The second number-of-games management process is for managing the number of games played during the AT mode. be.

In the first game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set. If there is, the first number-of-games management process is terminated. That is, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in a 2-bet game, the number of games in the portent mode and the CZ mode is not managed. If neither BB state exists, the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether the CZ counter is greater than 0 and the number of games set at the time of transition to the CZ mode has not been completed. As already explained, when the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode is won, the CZ mode flag is cleared in the AT lottery process. Therefore, even if the CZ mode flag is not set, it may be determined that the CZ counter is greater than 0 in step S1502.

By the way, as described above, when the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, a value equal to or greater than the CZ counter is input to the omen counter unless the immediate notification lottery is won. In other words, when the CZ counter is greater than 0 and the CZ mode flag is not set, it means that it is the premonition mode after winning the AT mode transition.

If the CZ counter is greater than 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter is executed in step S1503. Then, in step S1504, it is determined whether or not the CZ counter has reached 0, and if it has become 0, in step S1505 it is determined whether or not any CZ mode flag has been set. As described above, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode flag is cleared, so if any CZ mode flag is set in step S1505, This means that the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. If any CZ mode flag is set in step S1505, a process of setting a CZ end game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S1506. The CZ end game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize the game for which the CZ mode has ended, and is cleared after the game for which the CZ mode has ended (see step S203).

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step S1505, or after the processing at step S1506 is executed, processing for setting the CZ end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed at step S1507. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the CZ end command will be described later in detail.

If the CZ counter is 0 in step S1502, if the CZ counter is not 0 in step S1504, or after the process of step S1507 is executed, then in step S1508 the precursor counter is greater than 0 and the precursor mode is activated. It is determined whether or not the number of games corresponding to the precursor counter set in the setting process has not yet been completed. If the precursor counter is greater than 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter is executed in step S1509. Then, in step S1510, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become zero.

When the portent counter reaches 0, the flow advances to step S1511 to perform processing for clearing the portent flag. Then, in step S1512, AT type determination processing is performed to determine whether the current AT mode type is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. This process is a process corresponding to the process of step S1115. That is, in the AT type determination process of step S1512, for example, according to the setting value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous interval, the number of games in the advantageous interval, etc., or randomly this AT mode type will be determined by lottery. Note that the AT type determination process in step S1115 and the AT type determination process in step S1512 may have different selection rates between the first AT mode and the second AT mode. 2 may have a higher selection rate for the second AT mode.

In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode has been determined as a result of processing in step S1512. When the 1st AT mode is determined, in step S1514, the process of setting the notification flag for the 1st AT is executed, and in step S1515, the process of setting the 1st AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. After that, the number-of-games management process is terminated. By setting the notification flag for the first AT, the process for generating the pressing order notification for the second re-game winning in the above-described pressing order notification process is performed. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the 1st AT winning notification command will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S1513 that the AT mode to be shifted this time is not the first AT mode but the second AT mode, then in step S1516 a process of setting the notification flag for the second AT is executed, and in step S1517 the second AT mode is set. After executing the process of setting the winning notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the number-of-games management process is terminated. By setting the notification flag for the second AT, the process for generating the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning is performed in the above-described pressing order notification process. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the second AT winning notification command will be described later in detail.

In the second game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set. If there is, the second number-of-games management process ends. That is, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in a 2-bet game, the number of AT mode games is not managed. If it is not in any BB state, the process advances to step S1602 to determine whether or not the AT counter is greater than zero and the number of AT mode remaining games is greater than zero.

If the AT counter is greater than 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter is executed in step S1603. Then, in step S1604, it is determined whether or not the AT counter has become 0, and if it has become 0, processing for clearing the AT mode flag is executed in step S1605. Then, in step S1606, a process of setting the AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the AT end command will be described later in detail. If the AT counter is 0 in step S1602, or if the AT counter is not 0 in step S1604, the second game number management process is terminated.

After the process of step S1606 is executed, the third CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step S1607. 3 Perform processing to set the CZ mode flag. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode ends, it is configured to shift to the CZ mode, and the CZ mode to shift to when the AT mode ends is set to the third CZ mode, and the number of games is set in step S1607. determined by the lottery process. In the 3rd CZ mode game count lottery process, the 3rd CZ mode game count table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current 3CZ mode game count is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the third CZ mode game number table is set so that one of the 25th to 30th games is selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to play. For example, if 30 games are selected in the third CZ mode number-of-games lottery process, 30 is input to the CZ counter in step S1608.

After setting the third CZ mode flag in step S1609, a process of setting the third CZ mode start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1610. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the third CZ mode start command will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process, after executing the game number management process in steps S1403 and S1404, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the first AT start flag is set. As described above, the 1st AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which the second replay winning is possible when causing the transition to the 1st AT mode. More specifically, the 1st AT notification flag is This is a flag that is set at the start of the game in which Rep B is normally won in the situation where it is set. That is, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. If the first AT start flag is set, the first AT start flag is cleared in step S1406, and the first AT flag is set in the flag storage area 106d in step S1407. As already explained, by setting the 1st AT flag, an additional lottery using the 1st AT additional lottery table is performed.

If it is determined in step S1405 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the 2nd AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which the third replay winning is possible when causing the transition to the 2nd AT mode. More specifically, the 2nd AT notification flag is This is a flag that is set at the start of the game in which the normal reply C is won in the situation where it is set. That is, the second AT start flag is also not set based on the winning result. If the second AT start flag is set, the second AT start flag is cleared in step S1409, and the second AT flag is set in the flag storage area 106d in step S1410. If it is determined in step S1408 that the second AT start flag is not set, the winning result handling process is terminated. As already explained, when the second AT flag is set, an additional lottery using the second AT additional lottery table is performed.

After executing the process of step S1407 or step S1410, the process of inputting 50 to the AT counter is executed in step S1411. As already explained, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and in this embodiment, 50 games are set as the initial number of games in either the first AT mode or the second AT mode. The number of initial games may differ between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, or the number of initial games may be determined by lottery. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of initial games tends to be larger in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In step S1412, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed, and in step S1413, a process of setting the AT mode flag is executed. Then, in step S1414, after executing the process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result corresponding process is terminated. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the AT start command will be described later in detail.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19). This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, in step S1703, a process of adding 1 to the normal counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The normal counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games that have been started as a normal period rather than an advantageous period.

After executing the process of step S1703, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set in step S1704. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1705. Then, in step S1706, processing for setting an advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1707, the number of games played during the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval. Then, in step S1708, an advantageous section transition game process is executed.

In the advantageous interval transition game processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, first CZ mode game number lottery processing is executed in step S1801, and the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter in step S1802. Then, in step S1803, processing for setting the first CZ mode flag is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be set to the CZ mode when transitioning to the advantageous section, and when triggered by the advantageous section transition, the first CZ mode is set, and the number of games is the lottery process in step S1801. determined by In the first CZ mode game number lottery process, the first CZ mode game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current number of games in the first CZ mode is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 36, the first CZ mode number-of-games table is set so that one of 8 games to 10 games is selected. The selection rate varies depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to select. For example, if 10 games are selected in the first CZ mode number-of-games lottery process, 10 is input to the CZ counter in step S1802.

After setting the first CZ mode flag in step S1803, the process of setting the first CZ mode start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1804. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the first CZ mode start command will be described later in detail.

In the subsequent step S1805, ceiling game number lottery processing is executed. In the ceiling game number lottery process, the ceiling game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current ceiling game number is randomly determined. In the number-of-top-games table, the number of games that are likely to be selected (341, 682, for example) and the number of games that are difficult or not to be selected are set within a range not exceeding the maximum number of top-level games (999 games in this embodiment). . In addition, in the ceiling game number table, the minimum number of games is 100 games, and during the first CZ mode set at the time of transition to the advantageous section (more specifically, during the omen mode when winning the AT mode transition during the first CZ mode ) is set so that the ceiling game is not reached.

In step S1806, based on the result of the processing in step S1805, a process of inputting the number of ceiling games to the ceiling counter is executed. After that, the advantageous section transition game processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the section display first process, after executing the advantageous section transition game process in step S1708, or when it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous section flag is set, in step S1709, any Determine whether the CZ mode flag or AT mode flag is set. As already explained, in the present embodiment, in the AT mode or the CZ mode, it is possible to notify the pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. It can be said that the conditions for starting the display of the section indicator are satisfied. If any flag is set, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step S1710.

If it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1711 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1711, a process for continuing the lighting state of the eighth display segment N8 is performed. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

Even if it is determined in step S1704 that neither the advantageous section flag nor the advantageous section winning game flag is set, or if the advantageous section flag or the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the CZ mode flag If the AT mode flag is not set and the normal mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1712. In step S1712, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1710 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1711, the process proceeds to step S1713. In step S1713, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1712 or step S1713, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1714. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1715, a process for displaying the calculation result of step S1714 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step S1715, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1714 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1715, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1714. Further, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration in which "0" is always displayed by is also possible. A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second processing is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S1902, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S1902, in step S1903, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1903, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay winning prize, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1903, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1904, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1905. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the number of advantageous zone games AG (number of games completed in the advantageous zone), an AT counter (number of remaining games in AT mode), a CZ counter (number of remaining games in CZ mode), and an omen counter It is determined whether or not the total number of remaining games in the mode is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is greater than the advantageous zone increase/decrease number. Determine whether there are many situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the following step S1906, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether or not the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous interval games MY has reached the upper limit of the increase in number of 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1907. In the following step S1908, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1909, a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed. In step S1910, a process of clearing the normal counter is performed. exit.

In more detail, the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step S1909 will be described in more detail. is returned to the initial value. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, various CZ mode flags, etc. are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the number of games in the advantageous interval AG, the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous interval MY, the omen counter for the omen mode, the counter for the number of continuous games in the CZ mode, etc., are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S1906 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1911, and the CZ end game flag is set. Determine whether or not

Here, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in various CZ modes, the CZ mode flag is cleared when the AT mode winning flag is set (steps S808 to S810). The CZ end game flag is a flag that is set when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (CZ counter) becomes 0 while the CZ mode flag remains set. Therefore, when the CZ end game flag is set, it means that the CZ mode has ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

If the CZ mode end game flag is set in step S1911, it is determined in step S1912 whether the second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set.

The second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set in step S1912, and the second CZ mode, which is set with the opportunity of winning the CZ mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, or the end of the AT mode, is set with the opportunity. If the third CZ mode is ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the process advances to step S1907 to execute advantageous section end processing. On the other hand, in step S1912, the first CZ mode flag is set instead of the second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag, and the first CZ mode set with the transition to the advantageous section as a trigger wins the AT mode transition lottery. If the process ends without doing so, the process advances to step S1913 to clear the first CZ mode flag and then ends the second section display process.

That is, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section ends, while the first CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery , the advantageous section continues without ending. Note that the second CZ mode flag and the third CZ mode flag are cleared at the time of processing for ending the advantageous section (step S1909).

<advantageous section and display mode>
The relationship between advantageous sections and display modes will be described with reference to FIG.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, an advantageous section in which the pushing order notification can occur and a normal section in which the pushing order notification does not occur are set. , the situation in which the advantageous section flag is not set is the normal section. The advantageous zone flag is a flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. For example, the RAM 106 is initialized when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed (the winning probability is changed). Then, the advantageous section flag is also cleared. In other words, when the setting value is changed and the power is turned on, the game is started from the normal section. In the normal section, the display mode is set to the normal mode in which the pressing order notification does not occur.

In the normal section, when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the transition to the advantageous section occurs. More specifically, the advantageous zone winning game flag is set by winning the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and the advantageous zone flag is set on the condition that the advantageous zone winning game flag is set in the first zone display process. be. Then, when the advantageous interval flag is set, an advantageous interval transition game process is executed, and in the advantageous interval transition game process, a process for setting the display mode to the first CZ mode is performed. In addition, the ceiling number of games (up to 999 games) is set when shifting to the advantageous section.

In the first CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 10 games, and during the first CZ mode, it is set so that the lottery for transition to the AT mode can be won with a high probability. In the first CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the transition to the AT mode occurs mainly via the portent mode. On the other hand, when the first CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode. However, in this case, the advantageous section does not end.

If it is an advantageous section and the display mode is the normal mode, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery are executed. If the CZ mode shift lottery is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the second CZ mode.

In the second CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 15 games, and even during the second CZ mode, as in the first CZ mode, it is set to be able to win the lottery for transition to AT mode with a high probability. ing. In the second CZ mode, if the lottery for the transition to the AT mode is won, the transition to the AT mode occurs mainly through the portent mode. On the other hand, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

The AT mode is a mode in which, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, notification of the order of pressing corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor combinations is generated, and it is a mode in which a large increase in medals can be expected. When the AT mode is shifted to the push order notification, it becomes possible to achieve the 1st minor winning prize to the 6th minor winning prize when each pushing order bell is won. The net increase is about 8.04 sheets. In the AT mode, the number of initial games is set to 50, and by winning the extra lottery, the number of remaining games is added. Also, the winning probability of the additional lottery is set higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode. When the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, the AT mode ends and the third CZ mode is set.

In the 3rd CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 25 to 30 games, and even during the 3rd CZ mode, like the 1st CZ mode and the 2nd CZ mode, it is possible to win the lottery for transition to AT mode with a high probability. is set to In the third CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, a transition to the AT mode occurs. On the other hand, when the third CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

As already explained, in the CZ mode, an AT mode transition lottery using the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed in each game, and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is more AT than the normal AT mode transition lottery table. It is set so that it is easy to win the mode transition. Further, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ uses the point value obtained in each game of the CZ mode to determine the propriety of the AT mode transition lottery. Then, in terms of the fact that an AT mode transition lottery is executed every game in CZ mode, and the point value can be obtained in each game in CZ mode, the longer the number of games set to CZ mode, the more AT mode transition. It can be said that it is easy to win the lottery. That is, winning the AT mode transition lottery is easier in the second CZ mode than in the first CZ mode, and winning the AT mode transition lottery in the third CZ mode is easier than in the second CZ mode.

Then, although the 1st CZ mode is less likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the first CZ mode, the advantageous section does not end, so from the viewpoint of the continuity of the advantageous section, the first CZ mode is better than the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode. It is more advantageous for the player than

<About the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 50, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not illuminated) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to the advantageous section that has an instruction function such as notification of the pressing order.

In the normal section, for example, if you win the lottery to move to the advantageous section by winning the 7th small winning combination (watermelon), etc., the game will shift to the advantageous section in the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established, and the game will start. Then, measurement of the number of games executed in the advantageous interval (counting of the number of games AG in the advantageous interval) is started. As described above, the first CZ mode is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and the push order notification may occur in the first CZ mode, so the display of the section indicator in the advantageous section transition game (first CZ mode transition game) , the eighth display segment N8 lights up. More specifically, when the advantageous section transition game (first CZ mode transition game) starts (when the start lever 41 is operated), the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated, the push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can figure out the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game (timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the last reel are pressed) ), the display ends. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered. As conditions for ending the advantageous section, in addition to the number of continuous games and the number of increased medals reaching the upper limit, in this embodiment, the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode are ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery. is When the advantageous section ends, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals ends (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). In addition, when medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation (the timing at which the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the final reel is completed). do.

As described above, by shifting to the advantageous section, the push order notification can occur, and the transition to the advantageous section (transition to the specific section) and the end of the advantageous section are indicated by the eighth display segment N8. clearly informed. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to clearly grasp the situation (specific section, substantial increase section) in which at least the benefit of the pushing order notification can be enjoyed. It is possible. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefit of the pushing order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the pushing order notification is illegally received even though it is not in the advantageous section. Thus, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being carried out.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode among the CZ modes ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, not only the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode but also the advantageous section ends. Then, when the advantageous interval ends, the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator is turned off, so that the player can clearly understand that the advantageous interval has ended. In other words, by turning off the eighth display segment N8, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode.

As a result, there is a high possibility that the game will end in many cases when the eighth display segment N8 is turned off. In addition, the gaming machine on which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off is also a mark that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the immediately preceding second CZ mode or third CZ mode. The action of picking up the winning lottery becomes difficult, and in any case, turning off the light of the eighth display segment N8 can be one of the causes of the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is provided with a characteristic configuration that eliminates the decrease in operating rate caused by the turning off of the eighth display segment N8. The configuration will be described below.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S2002. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, or after the processing of step S2002 is executed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the timing is before the start of the game. The timing before the start of the game is a state in which a bet number operation such as operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or operation of the medal insertion slot 45 is performed, or a replay state setting process can be performed. At the timing before the start of the game, a process of setting an effect corresponding to a command at the time of betting from the main control device 101 is mainly performed. The command at the time of betting is a command output from main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a command set in the BET processing of step S204 of the normal processing. In step S2004, a bet-time effect setting process for setting an effect based on the current bet operation is executed based on the bet-time command.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003 or after the processing of step S2004 is executed, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not it is time to start the game after betting. The game start timing is a state in which the operation of the start lever 41 is valid. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result Precursor command set in processing (Fig. 30) or section display first processing (Fig. 46), 1st AT winning immediate notification command, 2nd AT winning immediate notification command, 2nd CZ mode start command, add-on command and push order notification command , first CZ mode start command, and the like. In step S2006, a start-time effect setting process is executed based on these start-time commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2005, or after the process of step S2006 is executed, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. When each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating, processing for setting an effect corresponding to each stop operation command from the main control device 101 is performed. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In step S2008, each stop operation effect setting process for performing effect setting based on the current stop operation is executed based on each stop operation command.

If a negative determination is made in step S2007 or after the processing of step S2008 is executed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped. When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, processing for setting an effect corresponding to the all-stop command from the main control device 101 is performed. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to commands, there are an AT start command, a CZ end command, a 1st AT winning notification command, a 2nd AT winning notification command, an AT end command, a 3rd CZ mode start command, etc., which are set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 43). In step S2010, an all-stop effect setting process is executed based on these all-stop commands.

When a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2011, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step S2011, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) can be set without going through the main controller 101. Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

Hereinafter, the effect setting process at the time of start and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described, and then the effect setting process at the time of bet will be described.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S2006 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. If the push order notification command has been received, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply B. If the push order notification command is set in the game that is normal reply B, it means that it is the start game of the first AT mode. Setting processing for performing notification effect is executed.

If the determination in step S2103 is negative, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply C. If the push order notification command is set in the game that is usually reply C, it means that it is the start game of the second AT mode. Setting processing for performing notification effect is executed.

A negative determination in step S2105 means that the result of the lottery for this game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing. A setting is executed so that the pressing order notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. - 特許庁

If a negative determination is made in step S2101 or step S2102, or after any one of steps S2104, S2106 and S2107 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not it is currently a wait period as a specific period before the wait time elapses. As described above, the wait time must elapse from when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the start of the game to when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the start of the next game. For example, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are configured to wait for the start of rotation. can be determined by If it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has not passed, the process of turning on the wait display section 78 is executed in step S2109, and the process returns to step S2108. If the weight display unit 78 is already lit in step S2109, that state is maintained.

If it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has elapsed, the process advances to step S2110 to execute processing for turning off the wait display section 78. FIG. If the weight display section 78 is already in the off state, that state is maintained. After that, a process of setting an effect at the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in steps S2111 to S2122 is executed. That is, the pressing order notification effect executed in steps S2101 to S2107 is executed based on the operation of the start lever 41 even before the wait period elapses. The effect at the start is not executed unless the wait period has passed even if the start lever 41 is operated, and is executed when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

To simplify the explanation, if it is determined in step S2108 that the wait period has not elapsed, a loop process that waits until the wait period elapses after executing the process in step S2109 will be used. However, the start-time effect setting process may be ended. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the effect setting process at the start does not end until the wait period has elapsed. This point also applies to other loop processes.

As the effect setting process executed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, first, in step S2111, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning of a specific combination. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear (hard to win) as a lottery result of each game. Watermelon is set as a specific role. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the AT mode transition lottery is set to be more likely to win than the lottery results other than the specific role. If the lottery result of the game this time is that the special combination is won, the process for informing the special combination is executed in step S2112. In the specific winning notification processing, settings are made so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 notify that the lottery result of the current game is one of the specific winning combinations. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), three characters of exclamation marks are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided as the special combination notification. A production is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2111, or after the process of step S2112 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2113. In step S2113, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received. When the add-on command is received, setting processing of add-on effect is executed in step S2114. In the setting processing of the additional effect, an additional effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed as notification corresponding to the addition of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The mode of the additional effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the additional effect is performed. For example, the number of additional games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the additional effect is performed. A mode may be included, or, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode is included in a so-called add-on effect in which an add-on effect is executed in a situation where the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). .

If a negative determination is made in step S2113, or after executing the process of step S2114, it is determined in step S2115 whether or not the 1st AT winning immediate notification command or the 2nd AT winning immediate notification command has been received. The 1st AT winning immediate notification command and the 2nd AT winning immediate notification command are commands output from the main controller 101 when the AT mode transition lottery is won and the immediate notification lottery is won. If these commands have been received, settings are made in step S2116 so that the corresponding AT winning immediate notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the AT winning immediate notification effect displays characters such as "AT confirmed!" In addition, in the AT winning immediate notification effect, which of the first AT and the second AT has been won is specified based on the received immediate notification command. For example, when the first AT mode is won and when the second AT mode is won, the background color of the auxiliary display section 65 in the AT winning immediate notification effect is made different so that the player can select which AT mode. It is preferable to make it possible to clearly grasp whether the mode has been won. In addition, it does not indicate which of the 1st AT or 2nd AT has been won, but suggests that the 1st AT or 2nd AT has been won using the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, etc. may be configured. By doing so, it is possible not to eliminate the game feeling of looking forward to which AT has been won until the AT start game after the AT winning immediate notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2115, or after the process of step S2116 is executed, it is determined in step S2117 whether or not a precursor command has been received. As already explained, the portent command is a case in which the AT mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process (FIG. 29) on the main controller 101 side, and the immediate notification lottery is not won (step S1105: NO). ), in addition to the information that the AT mode winning flag is set, the number of games from the game (the game in which the AT mode winning flag is set) to the game for which the AT winning notification effect is to be performed information (precursor counter value). When the portent command has been received, the portent effect setting process is executed in step S2118.

In the portent effect setting process, a process of setting a continuous effect that can be continuously executed over a plurality of games as a portent effect is performed. In the continuous effect in the present embodiment, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in the final game, and the continuous effect set in the sign effect setting process is the AT mode in the final game of the continuous effect. is set so that the notification of winning is executed.

In the portent effect setting process, if the display mode that wins the AT mode transition lottery is not the first CZ mode, but the second CZ mode, the third CZ mode, or the normal mode, the number of portent games included in the portent command A continuous effect is set so that the success/failure result of the AT mode shift lottery (AT mode win notification) is performed after the corresponding number of games. As already explained, the second CZ mode continues from 8 games to 15 games, and 13 games to 15 games are set as the number of precursor games when winning the AT mode transition, so after shifting to the second CZ mode AT The number of games to be played until the success/failure result of the mode transition lottery is announced (AT mode winning announcement) is any one of 13 games to 30 games. In the present embodiment, it is set so that continuous production is started when shifting to the second CZ mode, and when winning the AT mode shift lottery in the second CZ mode, when shifting to the second CZ mode In the 13th game to the 30th game of the continuous effect that has been started, the success/failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode win notification). The 3rd CZ mode continues from 25 games to 30 games, and the number of games remaining in the 3rd CZ mode is set as the number of precursor games when the AT mode transition wins. In other words, the number of games from the transition to the third CZ mode to the notification of the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is any one of 25 to 30 games. In this embodiment, it is set so that the continuous effect is started even when shifting to the 3rd CZ mode, and when winning the AT mode shift lottery in the 3rd CZ mode, when shifting to the 3rd CZ mode In the 25th to 30th games of the started continuous effect, the success/failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode win notification).

On the other hand, if the display mode won in the AT mode transition lottery is the first CZ mode, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance has already started, and if the continuous performance has not started. , Continuous performance is set so that the success/failure result of the AT mode shift lottery (AT mode win notification) is performed after the number of games corresponding to the number of precursor games included in the precursor command. The 1st CZ mode is performed over 8 games to 10 games, and if you win the AT mode transition lottery in the 1st CZ mode, the number of precursor games of 5 games is set, so in the 1st CZ mode The number of games from the transition to the notification of the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is any one of 5 to 15 games. In addition, when the display mode for which the AT mode transition lottery is won is the first CZ mode and the continuous effect has already started, the number of remaining games of the continuous effect is set to the current predictive game number. process. As described above, when the transition to the second CZ mode is set so that the continuous effect is started, furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the second CZ mode does not win the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous It is set so that the production will be taken over. Therefore, when the AT mode shift lottery is won in the first CZ mode, the continuous performance has already started means that the continuous performance started at the start of the second CZ mode has been taken over. As mentioned above, the 2nd CZ mode continues from 8 games to 15 games, so if you win the AT mode transition lottery in the 1st CZ mode via the 2nd CZ mode, continuous production when transitioning to the 2nd CZ mode The number of games from the start of the AT mode transition lottery to the notification of the success or failure of the AT mode selection lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be anywhere from 13 games to 30 games, excluding the number of games in the normal section. . In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, assuming that the normal section is one game, the 31st game from the 14th game of the continuous effect started at the time of transition to the second CZ mode. The success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is announced (AT mode winning announcement) with the eyes.

In this case, in particular, in the case where the success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode winning notification) in the continuous effect started at the time of transition to the second CZ mode, if not via the first CZ mode, the In the 13th game to the 30th game of the continuous effect, the success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode winning notification), and in the case of via the first CZ mode, the 14th game to the 31st game of the continuous effect The result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (notification of success in AT mode) with the eyes. Therefore, in the continuous effect started at the time of transition to the second CZ mode, in the 13th game to the 30th game, the success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode winning notification), whether via the first CZ mode That is, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the advantageous section has once ended from the number of games of the continuous effect. Although the detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the number of games in which such notification of winning the AT mode is performed, a game of continuous production of non-winning as a result of the AT mode transition lottery is performed. number is set. Therefore, for example, when the continuous production is started in the second CZ mode, it becomes difficult to determine whether the advantageous section has ended during the continuous production from the contents of the continuous production and the number of games, and the game is played at the end of the advantageous section. are becoming harder to terminate.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if a negative determination is made in step S2117 or after the process of step S2118 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, it is determined whether or not the first CZ mode start command or the second CZ mode start command has been received. If any CZ mode start command has been received, in step S2120, CZ mode start setting processing is executed. When the first CZ mode start command is received, when the continuous performance is not continued, a new performance for the first CZ mode is started, and when the continuous performance is continued, the concerned Continue the continuous production. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the second CZ mode is started, the continuous effect is started, and when the second CZ mode start command is received, the setting process for the CZ mode start , setting is made so that the continuous effect of the number of games longer than the total number of the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode and the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode that can be executed thereafter is started. As a result, even when the CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, when the first CZ mode is subsequently started (when shifting to the advantageous section), a situation is created in which the continuous performance continues. becomes possible.

When a negative determination is made in step S2119, or after the processing of step S2120 is executed, continuous effect setting processing is executed in step S2121. As described above, the continuous effect setting process sets the effect for each game of the continuous effect that can be continued over a plurality of games in informing the success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery, and sets the AT mode transition lottery. It is a process for setting a continuous effect in the case of non-winning.

Thereafter, in step S2122, other start-time effect setting processing is executed, and then the present start-time effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2122, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, and the like are performed.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process in step S2010 will be described with reference to FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the AT start command, the CZ end command, the 1st AT winning notification command, the 2nd AT winning notification command, the AT end command, the 3rd CZ This is a process for setting effects in the case of a full stop command such as a mode start command.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command has been received. The first AT winning command and the second AT winning notification command are commands output from the main controller 101 side when the precursor counter becomes 0 after the AT mode winning flag is set. When these AT winning notification commands are received, the process proceeds to step S2202, and the corresponding AT winning notification effect is set to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as a betting effect for the next game. to run. The AT winning notification effect is a effect after the winning of the AT mode transition lottery is announced in the final game of the continuous effect set as described above. is set as a battle effect in which the ally character wins in the battle effect in the final game of the continuous effect, and then the effect that makes the ally character happy when betting in the next game is set as the AT win notification effect. You may The AT winning notification effect set here is a bet number operation such as operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 as an effect when betting on the next game. is executed when

If it is determined in step S2201 that the AT winning notification command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not an AT start command has been received. In addition, the case where the AT start command is received means the case where the second re-game or third re-game pressing order notification effect is performed at the start of the game. In this case, in step S2204, settings are made so that the AT start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the AT start effect is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 with a start re-game pattern corresponding to the type of AT mode to be started this time (in the case of the first AT mode, the second re-game is displayed). Along with the diagonal alignment of the corresponding "BAR" symbols (Fig. 14(a)), etc., and the bottom alignment of the "White 7" symbols corresponding to the third replay in the second AT mode (Fig. 14(c), etc.), Characters such as "AT start!"

If the AT start command has not been received in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the AT end command has been received in step S2205. If the AT end command has been received, settings are made in step S2206 so that the AT end effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the AT end effect displays the number of continuous games in the current AT mode and the number of medals won in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If the AT end command has not been received in step S2205, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the third CZ mode start command has been received. When the 3rd CZ mode start command is received, in step S2208, 3rd CZ mode production start processing is executed. In the 3rd CZ mode effect start process, the continuous effect is set to start over the current number of continuous games in the 3rd CZ mode (25th game to 30th game).

If it is determined in step S2207 that the third CZ mode start command has not been received, it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the CZ mode end command has been received. If the CZ end command has been received, at step S2210 an effect setting process for CZ end is executed. In the effect setting process for ending CZ, when the CZ mode to end this time is the second CZ mode, setting is made so that the continuous effect being executed is continued. Also, if the CZ mode to be terminated this time is the first CZ mode, if the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, that is, the continuous effect of the second CZ mode is taken over and the first CZ mode When the performance is performed, the continuous performance is terminated as it is, and when the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode not via the second CZ mode, the continuous performance set in the first CZ mode is continued. set as Then, when the CZ mode to be terminated this time is the third CZ mode, the continuous effect set in the third CZ mode is set to be terminated as it is.

If the CZ mode end command is not received in step S2209, or after executing any of the processes in steps S2202, S2204, S2206, S2208 and S2210, in step S2211, the current game The game result information (lottery result and information on whether or not a prize has been won) and information on the number of bets for the current game are temporarily stored. Then, in step S2212, after executing other all-stop effect setting processing, the present all-stop effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2212, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, control is performed so that sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, and control is performed during replay. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting.

In this way, in the present embodiment, by shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section through the advantageous section transition lottery, and winning the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, a transition to the AT mode occurs and many medals can be obtained. In expected game properties, the transition to the AT mode is made to occur mainly through the CZ mode, and the subsequent content of the continuous performance set in the CZ mode is resolved by predicting the end of the advantageous section. I am trying to In this case, not only the CZ mode but also the AT mode transition lottery is executed according to the lottery result of each game. It is set so that it is easy to win, and other results make it difficult to win AT mode transition.

As already explained, the specific wins in this embodiment are Chance A to Chance C, Cherry A to Cherry C, and Watermelon. On the other hand, Chance A to Chance C and Cherry A to Cherry C are results in which winning is established as a result of replay. By setting the specific combination using the replay result in this way, it is possible to diversify the specific combination simply by increasing the types of replay results, and the replay result that does not cause an increase or decrease in medals. If so, it is possible to set a special combination while suppressing the impact on the payout rate. Furthermore, as in the normal replies A to C, while basically establishing the first replay result winning prize, at a predetermined timing (at the start of the AT mode), the second replay result winning prize and the third replay result winning prize It is also possible to change the result of winning and the number of stops without changing the privilege to be given according to the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, such as establishment of winning as a result of replay, and use it in the game. . In addition, for example, it is possible to improve the appearance rate of a specific combination by using the RT state, etc., in which the winning probability of the replay result is improved, and it is possible to configure the specific combination using the replay result. This is a great advantage in improving the interest in the game.

However, if the specific win is composed of the result of the minor win and the result of the replay as described above, the player is required to make a bet by himself/herself in the next game if the result is a minor win. In the case of the result, betting is not necessary due to the process of automatically inserting virtual medals, and the progress of the game is greatly different. Therefore, when a special win is established as a result of the replay, the player may feel a strong sense of discomfort due to the difference from the result of a small win, etc., which may hinder the smooth progress of the game. It is possible that it may be lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a notification mode is devised in the case where a win is established as a result of a replay result of such a specific combination. In the following, a description will be given of the mode of notification in the case of a replay result. In the following description, the first re-game result is also called a normal re-game result, and the re-game result other than the first re-game result is also called a specific re-game result.

<BET display section and BET display section>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming panel 25 is provided with a BET display portion 34 to the left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and a BET display portion 75 to the lower left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 56, the BET display section 75 has a first BET display section 75a, a second BET display section 75b, and a third BET display section 75c. All of the display units 75a to 75c are configured to be switchable between a lighting state (or blinking state) and a non-lighting state, and the number of bets is reported by the BET display units 75a to 75c in the lighting state. For example, when the first BET display portion 75a and the second BET display portion 75b of the BET display portions 75 are in a lighting state and the third BET display portion 75c is in a non-lighting state, it means that two bets have been made. Also, when all the bet display portions 75a to 75c are lit, it means that three bets have been made.

As shown in FIG. 1, the bet display section 34 also has a first bet display section 34a, a second bet display section 34b, and a third bet display section 34c. (or flashing state) and a non-lighting state. The number of bets is notified by the bet display portions 34a to 34c that are lit, as is the case with the BET display portion 75 described above.

However, as shown in FIG. 16, the BET display section 75 is connected to the main control device 101, the BET display section 34 is connected to the display control device 81, and the BET display section 75 is connected to the main control device 101 side. The difference is that the bet display unit 34 is controlled by the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side, while the bet display unit 34 is controlled by the CPU 102 . Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the area of the bet display portion 34 is larger than that of the bet display portion 75 through which light is transmitted when each of the display portions 34 and 75 is turned on. The bet display portion 34 is set to be larger than the bet display portion 75 so as to attract the player's attention (easier to understand). It should be noted that the bet display section 34 may have a configuration that is easier for the player to see (easier for the player to understand) than the bet display section 75, and the luminance and light amount when the bet display section 75 is turned on are increased. Alternatively, the bet display unit 34 may be configured by an operable accessory or the like, or the number of bets by the bet display unit 34 may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. .

1, the gaming state display portion 76 is a display portion smaller than the bet display portion 34 and the first credit insertion switch 56, similarly to the BET display portion 75. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 56, it has a replay state display portion 76a, a start possible state display portion 76b, and an acceptable state display portion 76c. It is configured to be switchable between the off state and the off state. The replay state display section 76a is for notifying that the replay state is set so that the next game can be executed with the same number of bets as the bet count of the current game. , and is turned off when the game set to the replay state ends. The ready-to-start display unit 76b is for notifying that the ready-to-start state in which the operation for starting the game can be accepted has been reached. When the start operation is accepted, the light is turned off. The acceptable state display portion 76c is for notifying that the medal insertion port 45 is in an acceptable state in which medals can be inserted. is not accepted, the light is turned off. More specifically, when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a that guides the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 to the storage passage 47 side is energized, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is turned on, and the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. When the path switching solenoid 46a is not energized, it is turned off.

<BET processing>
Next, the BET processing performed in step S204 in the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous game was a win as a replay result. Such processing can be determined based on the information of the previous game stored in the medal payout processing of step S214. If it is the next game in which any replay result winning has been established, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the winning replay result is the first replay result as the normal replay result. Winning as a result of the normal replay can be won when the normal replay A to normal replay C are won, and when the normal replay A to normal replay C are won, the stop operation of the right reel 32R is performed first. As long as it is not performed, basically winning a prize is established as a result of the normal replay (FIG. 39). If the game is the next game after the game in which the normal replay winning has been established, the process of setting the normal replay flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S2303. On the other hand, if it is the next game of the game in which the replay result other than the first replay result as the specific replay result has been won, a process of setting the specific replay flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed in step S2304. do.

Note that the processing of steps S2301 to S2304 may be performed in the medal payout processing or payout determination processing.

After executing the process of step S2303 or step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2305, the number of bets of the previous game is grasped from the BET counter provided in the various counter areas 106e, and the value of the BET counter is temporarily stored in a register or the like. Execute the memorizing process. The BET counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of bets placed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2301, or after the process of step S2305 is executed, the BET counter is cleared in step S2506. Then, in step S2307, a process of ascertaining the specified number of coins for the current game is executed. As already explained, the prescribed number of bets is the number of bets that allows the game to be executed. 3 is set as the prescribed number.

In the following step S2308, processing is executed to turn on the acceptable state display section. Then, in step S2309, the normal replay flag or the specific replay flag is set, and it is determined whether or not it is the next game in which any replay result winning has been established, and the replay result winning has been established. If it is the next game to be played, a replay setting process is executed in step S2310.

<Replay setting processing>
In the replay setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, first, in step S2401, a process for turning on the replay status display section is executed. In subsequent step S2402, a process of turning off all the BET display sections is executed. Then, in step S2403, it is determined whether or not the specific replay flag is set, and if it is not set and the game is the next game in which the normal replay result winning has been established, then in step S2404, a normal BET command is issued. is set as an output target to the display control device 81 . The normal BET command is a command for controlling the bet display section 34 on the display control device 81 side.

After setting the normal BET command, the process proceeds to step S2405. Steps S2405 to S2410 are processes for automatically inserting virtual medals based on winnings as a result of normal replay. That is, in step S2405, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and in step S2406, a process of lighting (or blinking) the BET display section corresponding to the BET counter incremented this time is executed. Specifically, if the BET counter is 1 as a result of the processing of step S2405, the first BET display portion 75a is lit, and if the BET counter is 2, the second BET display portion 75b is lit, and the BET counter is 3. If so, the third BET display section 75c is turned on. Then, in step S2407, a process of setting a replay BET command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The replay BET command is a command for turning on the bet display section 34 on the display control device 81 side in conjunction with the lighting processing of the BET display section 75 in step S2406.

In the subsequent step S2408, a process of inputting 134 to the BET timers provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BET timer is a counter for defining the interval at which virtual medals are automatically inserted. The BET timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, and the value input in step S2408 is about 0. 0 after 2 seconds.

In step S2409, the BET timer becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not approximately 0.2 sec has passed since the processing of step S2408 was executed. When about 0.2 sec has passed and an affirmative determination is made in step S2409, it is determined in step S2410 whether or not the value of the BET counter has become equal to the bet number of the previous game temporarily stored in step S2305. If the number of bets in the previous game has not been reached, the process returns to step S2405, and the process of automatically inserting virtual medals is executed again. When the value of the BET counter reaches the bet number of the previous game, an affirmative determination is made in step S2410, and the process proceeds to step S2411.

In step S2411, a process of setting a bet end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The bet end command is a command for letting the display control device 81 know that a series of bets has ended, and includes information on the current number of bets. In the subsequent step S2412, a process of setting a start enable flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The start enable flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the start operation of the start lever 41 can be accepted. In other words, when the startable flag is not set, even if the start operation of the start lever 41 is performed, it is not accepted. Further, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is set with a wait period, and the start possible flag is set so that it can be set before the wait period elapses. That is, even if the start operation of the start lever 41 is accepted because the start enable flag is set and the start operation of the start lever 41 is accepted, the start operation is accepted and the reels 32L and 32M are operated. , 32R can wait until the wait period elapses.

After executing the process of step S2412, in step S2413, after executing the process of turning on the start possible state display section 76b, the replay setting process is ended. By turning on the startable state display portion 76b, the player can understand that the start operation of the start lever 41 can be accepted.

On the other hand, if the specific re-game flag is set in step S2403 and the game is the next game in which the specific re-game result winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S2414. In step S2414, a process of setting a specific BET command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The specific BET command is a command for controlling the bet display section 34 on the display control device 81 side.

In the subsequent step S2415, a process of inputting the bet number of the previous game to the BET counter is executed. Then, in step S2416, processing is executed to turn on the BET display portions 75a to 75c corresponding to the value input to the BET counter. That is, when 1 is input to the BET counter in step S2415, only the first BET display section 75a is turned on, and when 2 is input to the BET counter, the first BET display section 75a and the second BET display section 75b are turned on. are turned on, the third BET display portion 75c is kept turned off, and when 3 is input to the BET counter, all the BET display portions 75a to 75c are turned on.

After executing the process of step S2416, the process advances to step S2411 to execute the process of setting the bet end command and the start possible flag, execute the process of turning on the start possible state display section 76b, and then perform this replay. End the game setting process.

That is, the process of automatically inserting virtual tokens based on the winning replay result is completed in a shorter time when the automatic insertion based on the winning result of the specific replay is performed than when automatically inserting the medals based on the winning result of the normal replay. is set to

Returning to the description of the BET process, if none of the replay flags are set in step S2309 or after the replay setting process is executed in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2311. The processes of steps S2311 to S2319 are processes for setting bets and credits by inserting medals from the medal inserting slot 45 and operating the credit inserting switches 56 and 57 .

That is, in step S2311, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is the upper limit value (50). The credit counter corresponds to credits displayed on the credit display unit 60 and corresponds to virtual game medium storage means possessed by the CPU 102 . If the credit counter has not reached the upper limit, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized in step S2312 so that the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are led to the accumulation passage 47 side. On the other hand, when the credit counter reaches the upper limit, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized in step S2313 so that the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are led to the discharge passage 48 side.

After executing the process of step S2312 or step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314. The processing of steps S2314 to S2319 is processing when a bet number operation such as insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45, operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed.

That is, in step S2314, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot 45. FIG. In the present embodiment, when a medal is inserted, the path through which the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 passes is upstream of the selector 46 provided with the medal passage switching solenoid 46a (the medal insertion slot 45 side). , an inserted medal detection sensor 45a is provided, and the CPU 102 can determine that medals have been inserted based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. If medals have been inserted, a medal insertion handling process is executed in step S2315.

If medals have not been inserted, the process advances to step S2316 to determine whether or not the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated based on the detection result of the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a. If the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated, a first operation corresponding process is executed in step S2317.

If the first credit insertion switch 56 has not been operated, it is determined in step S2318 whether or not the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated based on the detection result of the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a. If the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated, a second operation handling process is executed in step S2319.

After executing any of the processes in steps S2315, S2317 and S2319, or after making a negative determination in step S2318, it is determined in step S2320 whether or not the start possible flag is set. If not, the process returns to step S2311, and if the start possible flag is set, the BET process is terminated.

The medal insertion corresponding process, the first operation corresponding process, and the second operation corresponding process will be described below.

<Processing for inserting medals>
In the medal-insertion handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, first, it is determined whether or not the specific replay flag is set. If the specific re-game flag is not set and the specific re-game result win has not been established in the previous game, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the normal re-game flag is set. If the normal replay flag is not set and the normal replay result has not been won in the previous game, that is, if the current state is not set to the replay state, the process proceeds to step S2503, and the BET counter is set. Determine whether or not the number of sheets has been reached. As described above, the prescribed number of coins for the current game is grasped in step S2307. In any of the BB states, the specified number is 3, and in states other than the BB state, 2 and 3 are specified as the specified numbers. In step S2503, in the BB state, the BET counter is set. is 3, affirmative determination is made, and in states other than the BB state, it is determined whether or not the larger specified number of the specified number of 2 and 3 has been reached. That is, in a state other than the BB state, if the BET counter is 3, the determination is affirmative.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed in step S2504. In other words, in a state in which the specified number of coins is set to 2 and 3, a game with the specified number of 2 coins (2-bet game) can be started. It is possible to make a state in which a specified number of games (3-bet game) can be started.

In the following step S2505, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached the prescribed number by the medal insertion this time. If the prescribed number of sheets has been reached, it is determined in step S2506 whether or not the start possible flag has been set. If the start enable flag is not set, the process of setting the start enable flag is executed in step S2507, and the process of turning on the start enable state display section 76b is executed in step S2508.

If it is determined in step S2505 that the BET counter has not reached the prescribed number, or if the start possible flag is set in step S2506, or if the start possible state display unit 76b is turned on in step S2508 After that, in step S2509, a process of setting the insertion BET command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this medal insertion handling process is terminated. The inserted BET command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that a bet has been set by inserting medals this time.

If it is determined in step S2502 that the specific replay flag is not set but the normal replay flag is set, or if it is determined in step S2503 that the BET counter has reached the specified number, during the BB state When the BET counter is 3, or when the BET counter is 3 in a state other than the BB state, the process proceeds to step S2510. In step S2510, it is determined whether the credit counter is 50 or not. If the credit counter is not 50, a process of adding 1 to the credit counter is executed in step S2511, and a process of setting an input increase command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S2512. Then, in step S2513, it is determined whether or not the credit counter has reached 50 based on the result of processing in step S2511. state, and in step S2515 a process for turning off the acceptable state display section 76c is executed, and then this medal insertion handling process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2510, or if a negative determination is made in step S2513, the medal insertion handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the specific re-game flag is set in step S2501 and the specific re-game result win has been established in the previous game, the flow advances to step S2516 to send a specific input command to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as the output target of . The specific insertion command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that medals have been inserted in the replay state set based on the specific replay result win. After executing the process of step S2516, the process advances to step S2510, and on the condition that the credit counter has not reached 50, the process for increasing the credit is executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the credit counter by inserting medals even in a situation where the replay state is set. In the game state, a specific insertion command is output by inserting medals. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 when the specific input command is received will be described later in detail.

<Processing for first operation>
In the first operation corresponding process, which is the process when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. At step S2602, it is determined whether or not the normal replay flag is set. If the specific replay flag is not set, the normal replay flag is set, and a normal replay win has been established in the previous game, the bet is placed by operating the first credit insertion switch 56. Therefore, the first operation handling process is terminated. If neither the specific replay flag nor the normal replay flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is 1 or more and one or more virtual medals are stored. If the credit counter is less than 1 and virtual medals are not stored, no bet will be placed even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, so the first operation handling process is terminated. When the credit counter is 1 or more, the process advances to step S2604 to determine whether or not the current BET counter is the specific number. As already explained, the specific number is the number to be bet when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, and the specific number is set to 3 in the BB state. In the non-internal state before winning the BB, the specific number is set to 2, and in the internal state other than the BB state and after winning the BB, the specific number is set to 3 ( See Figure 24). If the current BET counter corresponds to the specific number, no new bet is placed even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, so the first operation handling process is terminated.

If the BET counter does not reach the specific number, then in step S2605, a process of setting the normal first operation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The normal first operation command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated in a situation other than the replay state, where the credit counter is 1 or more.

In the following step S2606, processing for subtracting 1 from the credit counter is executed based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56 this time. Then, in step S2607, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and in step S2608, a process of lighting the corresponding BET display portions 75a to 75c is executed.

In subsequent step S2609, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached a specific number by the processing in step S2606. If not, the flow advances to step S2610 to determine whether the credit counter is 1 or more. If the credit counter is 1 or more and the current operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 allows a further bet, a process of inputting 67 to the BET timer is executed in step S2611. As described above, the BET timer is a counter for defining the intervals for automatically inserting virtual medals, and the value input in step S2611 becomes 0 after about 0.1 sec. That is, when virtual medals are inserted by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the virtual medals are inserted at intervals shorter than the interval (approximately 0.2 sec) when the virtual medals are automatically inserted in the replay setting process. is done.

In step S2612, the BET timer becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not approximately 0.1 sec has passed since the process of step S2611 was executed. When about 0.1 sec has passed and an affirmative determination is made in step S2612, in step S2613 a process of setting a continuous bet command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process returns to step S2606. The consecutive bet command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that a plurality of bets are made by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 and the timing of the bets. In this case, the processing of steps S2606 to S2613 is repeated until the BET counter reaches the specific number (step S2609: YES) or the credit counter reaches 0 (step S2610: NO).

When the BET counter reaches the specific number in step S2609, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, a process of setting a bet end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. As described above, the bet end command is a command for letting the display control device 81 know that a series of bets has ended. Then, in step S2615, a process of setting the start enable flag is executed, and in step S2616, a process of turning on the start enable state display section 76b is executed, and then the first operation corresponding process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2610 that the credit counter has reached 0, the process advances to step S2617 to execute the process of setting the bet end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the first operation corresponding process. exit.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific replay flag is set, then in step S2618 the specific first operation command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this first operation is executed. Terminate the corresponding process. That is, in the re-game state set based on the establishment of the specific re-game result win, no bet is made when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, but the output setting of the specific first operation command is performed. will be Processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific first operation command is received will be described later in detail.

<Processing for second operation>
In the second operation corresponding process, which is the process when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. At step S2702, it is determined whether or not the normal replay flag is set. If the specific replay flag is not set, the normal replay flag is set, and a normal replay win has been established in the previous game, the bet is placed by operating the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, the second operation handling process is terminated as it is. If neither the specific replay flag nor the normal replay flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is 1 or more and one or more virtual medals are stored. When the credit counter is less than 1 and virtual medals are not stored, no bet is made even if the second credit input switch 57 is operated, so the second operation handling process is terminated.

When the credit counter is 1 or more, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not the BET counter is the specified number. If the number is not the specified number, the process advances to step S2705 to execute processing for setting the normal second operation command as an output target to the display control device 81 . The normal second operation command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated in a situation where the game is not in the replay state.

In subsequent step S2706, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and in step S2707, a process of subtracting 1 from the credit counter is executed. Then, in step S2708, processing is executed to turn on the corresponding BET display portions 75a to 75c.

In the following step S2709, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached the prescribed number by the processing in step S2706. If the prescribed number has been reached, the processing of setting a start possible flag is executed in step S2710, and step S2709 is executed. In S2711, the processing for turning on the start possible state display portion 76b is executed, and then the second operation corresponding processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2709 that the BET counter has not reached the prescribed number, the second operation handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2704 that the BET counter has reached the specified number, that is, if the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated even though the BET counter has reached the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2712. In step S2712, it is determined whether the BET counter is 3 or not. That is, in a gaming state in which the specified number of cards is set to 2 and 3, if the BET counter is 3 and the determination in step S2704 is affirmative, the determination in step S2712 is also affirmative, and the BET counter is 2. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, a negative determination is made in step S2712. If a negative determination is made in step S2712 and the BET counter is 2, the process advances to step S2705 to make a further bet and execute each processing corresponding to setting the BET counter to 3. In this case, a negative determination is made in step S2709, and the start enable flag is not set, but the start enable flag was set before that (when the BET counter reached 2).

In step S2712, when the second credit insertion switch 57 is further operated while 3 is input to the BET counter, the BET counter is set to 1 according to the value of the credit counter (1 from 3 bets). bet state) or not. That is, in step S2713, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is less than 49 and the credit counter can allow an increase of two virtual medals when switching from the state of betting three coins to the state of betting one coin. If the credit counter is less than 49 in step S2713, the process advances to step S2714 to execute a process of setting the normal second operation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. After that, in step S2715, 1 is input to the BET counter, and in step S2716, processing for increasing the credit counter by 2 is executed.

In the subsequent step S2717, a process of turning off the second BET display portion 75b and the third BET display portion 75c (putting the BET display portion 75 into a state indicating 1 bet) is executed. Then, in step S2719, a process for turning off the start possible state display section 76b is executed.

In the subsequent step S2720, it is determined whether or not the credit counter has reached 50. If the credit counter has reached 50, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized in step S2721, and in step S2722. After executing the process of turning off the acceptable state display section 76c, the second operation corresponding process is terminated. If the credit counter is not 50 in step S2720, the second operation handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2701 that the specific replay flag is set, then in step S2723 the process of setting the specific second operation command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the second operation is performed. Terminate the corresponding process. That is, in the replay state set based on the establishment of the specific replay result win, no bets are made when not only the first credit insertion switch 56 but also the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated. Output setting of the specific second operation command is performed. Processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific second operation command is received will be described later in detail.

<Processing for game status display section>
Next, the processing for the game state display section of step S209 in the normal processing (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the processing for the gaming state display section is a processing that is executed after the BET processing or the like is performed and after the start lever 41 is operated. 76, the start possible state display portion 76b and the acceptable state display portion 76c are lit. Further, when any of the replay wins have been established in the previous game, the replay state is set, and the replay state display section 76a is also lit.

In the processing for the game state display section, first, in step S2801, processing for turning off the start possible state display section 76b is executed. Then, in step S2802, the processing for turning off the acceptable state display section 76c is executed, and the processing for the game state display section ends.

That is, after the acceptable state display unit 76c is turned on (step S2308), the specified number of bets is placed and the startable state display unit 76b is turned on (steps S2413, S2508, S2616, step S2711), after that, when the start lever 41 is operated, the acceptance possible state display section 76c and the start possible state display section 76b are turned off. However, as already explained, the slot machine 10 has a wait period, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not start rotating immediately after the start lever 41 is operated. In this case, the timing at which the acceptable state display portion 76c and the startable state display portion 76b are turned off is not when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, but when the start lever 41 is operated. The player should clearly understand that the start operation has already been accepted and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a state of waiting for the start of rotation (wait period), and there is no need to perform the betting number operation or the start operation again. becomes possible.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of betting in step S2004 in the effect setting process (FIG. 51) on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process at the time of betting switches the bet display portions 34a to 34c from the off state to the on state or outputs a sound effect at the time of betting when the replay state is set or the number of bets is operated. By doing so, the current bet number is finally displayed in the bet display section 34. FIG. In the following description, the effect in which the current number of bets is finally notified by the bet display unit 34 is referred to as a bet corresponding effect. The effect of switching the state of 34c or outputting a sound effect is also called a betting process effect (specific notification).

In step S2901, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous game was any replay result win. If any one of the replay results is winning, a replay state bet effect setting process is executed in step S2902. Information on the game result of the previous game is stored in step S2211 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not the replay result wins based on the stored information on the game result. It is possible. By the way, if the game result of the previous game is not a win as a replay result, or if the information of the game result of the previous game is not stored (if it has been deleted) such as the first game after resetting such as clearing the RAM ), the process proceeds to step S2903.

In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the credit value provided in the various counter areas 183b is 1 or more. The credit corresponds to a credit counter on the main controller 101 side. If the number of credits is 1 or more, a process for turning on the first credit lamp 56b is executed. By turning on the first credit lamp 56b, the player can clearly understand that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is accepted. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may be configured to blink.

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, or after the processing of step S2904 is executed, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not an input BET command or a normal second operation command has been received as a current betting command. do. A case where an insertion BET command or a normal second operation command has been received means that one coin is inserted or one virtual medal is inserted in a replay state based on a normal replay result or in a state that is not in a replay state. means that a bet number operation has been performed, and in this case, a single bet effect setting process is executed in step S2906.

If neither the inserted BET command nor the normal second operation command has been received, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the normal first operation command has been received. The case where the normal first operation command is received means that the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a replay state based on the normal replay result or in a state that is not in the replay state. In this case, a continuous bet effect setting process is executed in step S2908.

If the normal second operation command has not been received, or if any of the processes of steps S2902, S2906, and S2908 have been executed, it is determined in step S2909 whether or not an input increase command has been received. . If the input increase command has been received, it means that the credit counter has increased due to the insertion of medals. In this case, in step S2910 control is performed so that the effect sound for credit increase is output from the speaker 64. .

After a negative determination is made in step S2909 or after the process of step S2910 is executed, other betting effect setting process is executed in step S2911, and then this betting effect setting process is terminated. In step S2911, for example, the AT winning notification effect set in step S2202 is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 based on the current bet number operation, or the bet number operation is performed in a continuous effect or the like. When the production develops based on the above, processing and the like for executing the production for such development are performed.

The single bet effect setting process and the consecutive bet effect setting process will be described below, and then the bet effect setting process for the replay state will be described.

<Single bet effect setting process>
The single bet effect setting process is a process executed when medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 or the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated in a state other than the replay state. In the single bet effect setting process, the bet display unit 34 side also executes a process of performing a bet effect in response to the bet being placed in the second operation corresponding process on the main control device 101 side. . Note that the bet effect corresponding to the bet of the second operation corresponding process on the main controller 101 side is also called a single bet effect.

In the single bet effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the lights-out flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The turned-off flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that some kind of bet has already been made in the current game (including automatic insertion when setting the replay state). If the lights-out flag is not set, a process of setting the lights-out flag is executed in step S3002.

In the subsequent step S3003, processing is executed to turn off all the bet display portions 34a to 34c. Then, in step S3004, processing is executed to turn on the first bet display section 34a. In this case, although the first bet display section 34a is turned off once, it is turned on immediately after that, and the player cannot or does not know that the first bet display section 34a has turned off. It is set to continue to the extent that it is difficult. It should be noted that the first bet display section 34a may not be turned off during the light-off processing of all the bet display sections 34a to 34c in step S3003.

After that, in step S3005, control is performed so that the bet effect sound is output from the speaker 64, and then the single bet effect setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the sound effect for betting and the sound effect for increasing credits are preferably different sound effects to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. It is preferable to grasp the

If the light-off flag is set in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, it is determined whether or not the third bet display portion 34c has been in the lighting state before the current bet operation is performed. If the third bet display portion 34c is in the lighting state, a process for lighting the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step S3007. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may be configured to blink. After that, the process proceeds to step S3003, and once all the bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned off, the first bet display portion 34a is turned on (step S3004). As a result, the state in which three medals have been betted has changed to the state in which one medal has been betted, and further betting is required by operating the first credit insertion switch 56. can be grasped by the player. If the first credit lamp 56b is already lit in step S3007, that state is maintained.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the third bet display portion 34c is not in the lit state, then in step S3008 processing is executed to turn on the bet display portions 34a to 34c corresponding to the current bet. After that, in step S3009, it is determined whether or not the third bet display unit 34c is lit, and if it is lit, the prescribed number of bets for this game is set to 3 in step S3010. determine whether or not there is If the specific number is 3 and the bet is 3, no further bet is required. In step S3005, bet effect sound output processing is executed, and then the single bet effect setting processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the third bet display unit 34c does not turn on by the process of step S3008 (step S3009: NO), or when it turns on but the specific number of bets is 2 instead of 3, , the first credit lamp 56b is kept lit, and output processing of a bet effect sound is executed in step S3005, after which the single bet effect setting processing is terminated.

<Consecutive bet effect setting process>
Next, the continuous bet effect setting process in step S2908 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The consecutive bet effect setting process is a process executed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a state other than the replay state. In the consecutive bet effect setting process, the bet display unit 34 side also executes a process of performing a bet effect in response to the bet being placed in the first operation corresponding process on the main control device 101 side. . Note that the bet effect matched to the bet of the first operation corresponding process on the main controller 101 side is also called a continuous bet effect.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the lights-out flag is set. If the lights-out flag has not been set, processing for setting the lights-out flag is executed in step S3102. Then, in step S3103, processing is executed to turn off all the bet display portions 34a to 34c.

In the following step S3104, a process for turning on the first bet display section 34a is executed, and in step S3105, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

In the subsequent step S3106, it is determined whether or not a bet end command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If the bet end command has not been received, the process advances to step S3107 and waits until a consecutive bet command is received. As already explained, the consecutive bet command is a command output when a next bet is made after making one bet when a plurality of bets are made based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. It is output about 0.1 sec after one bet is made. By receiving the consecutive bet command, an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, and the process proceeds to step S3108.

In step S3108, the second bet display portion 34b is turned on, and in the following step S3109, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a bet sound effect.

Then, in step S3110, it is checked again whether or not a bet end command has been received, and if not received, in step S3111, it waits until a continuous bet command is received. An affirmative determination is made in step S3111 by receiving the consecutive bet command, and the process proceeds to step S3112. In step S3112, the third bet display portion 34c is turned on, and in step S3113, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a bet sound effect.

When the bet end command is received in step S3106 or step S3110, or after the process of step S3113 is executed, the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step S3114, and then the main bet is executed. End the effect setting process.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the light-out flag has been set, and a bet number operation is performed by the first credit input switch 56 after some bet has already been made, the process proceeds to step S3115, and each bet display section It is determined whether or not only the first bet display portion 34a among 34a to 34c is lit. The first bet display portion 34a is lit, the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c are not lit, and one medal is betted. If a number operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3108, and processing is performed to turn on the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3115 that other than the first bet display portion 34a are in the lighting state, the process proceeds to step S3116, and the first bet display portion 34a and the second bet display portion 34b are in the lighting state and the third bet display portion 34b is in the lighting state. It is determined whether or not the bet display section 34c is in the off state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3116, and a bet number operation is performed by the first credit input switch 56 with two medals bet, the process proceeds to step S3112, and the third bet display section 34c is turned on. process. If a negative determination is made in step S3116 and the bet number operation is performed by the first credit input switch 56 with three medals bet, three medals are bet even though the specific number is two. In this case, the process advances to step S3103 to perform processing for turning on the first bet display section 34a and the second bet display section 34b.

<Bet effect setting processing for replay state>
Next, the replay state bet effect setting process in step S2902 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The re-game state bet effect setting process is a process executed when the game result of the previous game is a winning re-game result, and the effect differs depending on the type of the winning re-game result.

That is, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a specific BET command has been received. If the specific BET command has not been received and the game result of the previous game was a win as a result of the normal replay, a normal replay bet effect setting process is executed in step S3202, and then the replay state bet effect is executed. End the setting process. On the other hand, if a specific BET command has been received and a specific replay result win has been established in the previous game, in step S3203 whether or not an AT win notification effect is set as the current bet effect. determine whether As already described, the AT win notification effect as the bet time effect is the effect set in step S2202 in the stop time effect setting processing of the previous game. When the AT winning notification effect is not set, in step S3204, after executing the specific re-game bet effect setting process, the re-game state bet effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the AT win notification effect is set as the current betting effect, in step S3205, the bet corresponding effect setting process is executed, and then the replay state bet effect setting process is terminated.

<Normal replay bet effect setting process>
First, the normal regame bet effect setting process in step S3202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the normal regame bet effect setting process, the same number of bets as the number of bets for all games are placed in the replay setting process on the main control device 101 side, so that the bet display section 34 side also makes bets. Executes processing to render what has been done. Note that the bet effect matched to the bet in the replay setting process on the main control device 101 side is also referred to as a regame bet effect in the following description.

In step S3301, processing is executed to turn off all the bet display portions 34a to 34c. In the following step S3302, a process of setting an extinguished flag is executed. Then, in step S3303, the first bet display unit 34a is turned on, and in step S3304, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

In the subsequent step S3305, it is determined whether or not a bet end command has been received. In this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set, and the number of bets in the previous game is 2 or 3, so a negative determination is always made in step S3305.

In step S3306, it is determined whether or not a replay bet command has been received. As already explained, the regame bet command is a command that is output when making the next bet after making one bet in the regame setting processing (FIG. 58). , is output after about 0.2 sec. By receiving the replay bet command, an affirmative determination is made in step S3306, and the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, and in step S3308, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

In subsequent step S3309, it is determined whether or not a bet end command has been received, and if not received, in step S3310 the process waits until a replay bet command is received. When the replay bet command is received, the third bet display unit 34c is turned on in step S3311, and the bet effect sound is output from the speaker 64 in step S3312. After that, the normal regame bet effect setting process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3305 or step S3309 that the bet end command has been received, the normal regame bet effect setting process is terminated.

<Specific replay bet effect setting process>
Next, the specific re-game bet effect setting process in step S3203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the specific re-game bet effect setting process, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where bets are not actually made (re-game state), a process is executed to make an effect as if a bet was made. do. Note that the effect as if the bet has been placed is also referred to as a pseudo-bet effect in the following description.

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a bet end command has been received. As described above, in the replay setting processing (FIG. 58) based on the winning of a specific replay result, even when a plurality of virtual medals are automatically inserted, the virtual medals are automatically inserted at once. Basically, a bet end command is output immediately after the winning of a specific re-game result is established. In step S3401, it waits until a bet end command is received. By receiving the bet end command, an affirmative determination is made in step S3401 and the process proceeds to step S3402.

In step S3402, it is determined whether or not the lights-out flag is set. If the turned-off flag is set and the pseudo bet effect has already been performed, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, the pseudo-bet effect after step S3403 is not performed. If it is determined in step S3402 that the lights-out flag has not been set, then in step S3403 processing is executed to turn on the first credit lamp 56b. That is, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on and the operation of the first credit input switch 56 is prompted. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may be configured to blink.

In subsequent step S3404, it is determined whether or not any one of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command has been received. Receiving any command, in a replay state based on winning of a specific replay result, operation of the number of bets such as inserting medals from the medal inserting slot 45 or operating the first credit inserting switch 56 or the second credit inserting switch 57 is performed, the process advances to step S3405 to execute processing for turning off the first credit lamp 56b.

In the following step S3406, processing for turning off all the bet display portions 34a to 34c is executed, and in step S3406, processing for setting a turned-off flag is executed. Then, in step S3408, the first bet display unit 34a is turned on, and in step S3409, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

In the following step S3410, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game, that is, the number of bets when winning a prize as a result of the replay was 1 or not. Note that the number of bets on the previous game is stored in step S2211 in the effect setting process at all stop (FIG. 53). It should be noted that the number of bets set in the replay setting process may be grasped based on the bet end command received in step S3401 as described above. Incidentally, since the 1-bet game is not executed in this embodiment, a negative determination is always made in step S3410.

If the number of bets in the previous game is not 1, the process advances to step S3411 to execute processing of inputting 67 to the bet timer provided in the various counter areas 183b. The bet timer is for prescribing the interval between one bet and the next bet when performing a pseudo-bet effect. The bet timer is decremented by one at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle), and the bet timer input in step S3411 becomes 0 after about 0.1 sec. That is, the interval between one bet and the next bet in the pseudo bet effect is longer than the interval between one bet and the next bet in the replay bet effect, and the interval between one bet and the next bet in the continuous bet effect. It is set to be the same length as the interval.

In step S3412, it is determined whether or not the bet timer input in step S3411 has become 0, that is, whether or not approximately 0.1 sec has elapsed since the first bet display section 34a was turned on. , the process advances to step S3413. In step S3413, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, and in step S3414, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect. Then, in step S3415, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 2.

If the number of bets in the previous game was 3 instead of 2, a process of inputting 67 (approximately 0.1 sec) to the bet timer is executed in step S3416 until the bet timer reaches 0 in step S3417. stand by. If about 0.1 sec has passed since the second bet display portion 34b was turned on, the process advances to step S3418 to execute processing to turn on the third bet display portion 34c. After controlling to output from the speaker 64, this specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. It should be noted that if the determination in step S3410 or step S3415 is affirmative, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated without performing the subsequent processes.

In other words, the pseudo-bet effect based on the specific replay result win is basically the effect mode of the betting process effect up to the bet corresponding effect, and the effect mode of the betting process effect up to the bet corresponding effect in the continuous bet effect. are set to have the same effect mode. Specifically, in any case, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the bet process effect is such that the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially lit at intervals of about 0.1 sec, and the bet display portions 34a to 34c are lit. The sound effect at the time of betting is also common. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other minor combination results or missing results, and it is possible to give a sense of incongruity by configuring the specific combination with the replay result. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

In addition, the replay betting effect based on the normal replay result win is different from the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect based on the specific replay result winning effect and the continuous bet effect in the betting process effect up to the betting corresponding effect. It is set so as to have an effect mode different from the effect mode of the betting process effect. Specifically, in the betting process effect when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially lit at intervals of about 0.2 sec in the normal replay betting effect. On the other hand, in the pseudo bet effect and the continuous bet effect, the interval is about 0.1 sec as described above. From this point of view as well, it is easy to give the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other minor combination results or losing results, rather than the normal replay result.

Furthermore, as already explained, when the AT mode is started, the second re-game result win or the third re-game win is established among the specific re-game results. In this case, when the second replay result winning prize or the third replay result winning prize is established and the AT mode is to be started, the bet amount operation is performed rather than performing the start operation without performing the bet amount operation. , the AT mode to be started can be played with a new feeling. In other words, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet operation, it gives a strong impression that the result of the previous game has been inherited, so it is likely to be a mismatch with the intention to play the game with a new feeling. From this point of view, prompting the player to operate the number of bets at the start of the AT mode can help improve the interest of the AT mode. Further, for example, when an advantage (number of games, additional performance, etc.) in the AT mode to be started is notified at the start of the AT mode, it is better to notify along with the bet number operation rather than along with the start operation. It is possible to perform a start operation (a trigger operation for the lottery process) after knowing the degree of advantage. In this case, if a specific replay result win is established at the start of the AT mode and then the operation of the bet amount is prompted, the advantage of the AT mode is based on the operation of the bet amount at the start of the AT mode as described above. It is possible to easily add a configuration for notifying such as, etc., and this point also helps to improve interest. In this case, for example, the type of AT mode (first AT mode or second AT mode) may be notified based on the bet amount operation of the start game (the game after winning a specific replay result), or the initial number of games in AT mode. may be determined by lottery, and the initial number of games may be notified by the betting operation of the starting game.

If it is determined in step S3404 that none of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command have been received, the process proceeds to step S3420. In step S3420, it is determined whether or not the start operation command has been received and the start lever 41 has been operated. If the operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S3404.

That is, after the winning of the replay is established, the bet is set by the replay setting processing on the main control unit 101 side without the operation of the bet number operation of the first credit input switch 56 or the like. It is possible to start the game by operating the start lever 41 without operating the credit insertion switch 56 or the like. In the specific regame bet effect setting process, a pseudo bet effect is performed based on the bet number operation. Instead of performing a special bet effect, a bet corresponding effect in which the number of bets for the game to be started this time is notified is performed.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S3420 that the start operation command has been received, a process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step S3421. Then, in step S3422, it is determined whether or not it is in the wait period. At S3423, a process for switching all the bet display portions 34a to 34c to the extinguished state is executed. Then, in step S3424, a process of setting a light-off flag is executed, and in step S3425, a process of turning on the first bet display section 34a is executed. In subsequent step S3426, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 1. If not 1, in step S3427, a process of turning on the second bet display section 34b is executed. Then, in step S3428, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 2, and if not 2, in step S3429, processing is executed to turn on the third bet display section 34c. , the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3426 or step S2428, this specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated as it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the re-gaming state is set based on the winning of the specific re-gaming result as described above, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, and a pseudo-bet effect is performed based on the bet operation. It is configured to give the impression that it is treated in the same way as other small combination results and outlier results. However, the fact that the replay state has been set based on the winning of a specific replay result can also be grasped from the stop result, the replay state display section 76a, etc., and the replay state has been set. It is conceivable that there may be requests such as not wanting to go out of the way to manipulate the number of bets in spite of having grasped the In this case, it is thought that forcing a bet operation will lead to a significant decrease in the player's willingness to play. By doing so, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of players.

Moreover, if the pseudo bet effect is performed in spite of the fact that the start operation is performed without going through the bet amount operation as described above, the player may feel uncomfortable. Performing an unnecessary pseudo-bet effect in spite of the fact that the player has chosen not to perform the number operation is highly likely to lead to a decrease in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, it is considered that the number of bets on this game should be reported in order to ensure the transparency of the game.

Therefore, as described above, in the re-gaming state set based on the winning of the specific re-gaming result, when the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the betting process presentation is performed in the pseudo-bet presentation. Since the bet correspondence effect is performed without the bet, it is possible to clearly notify the number of bets for the current game while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, as described above, even when the start operation is performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not start to rotate unless the wait period has elapsed, and the wait period is reached. The start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is awaited until the period elapses. Also in the start effect setting process as described above, in the present embodiment, the start effect based on the start operation is put on standby until the wait period elapses. Then, when the start operation is performed during the wait period, the period until the wait period elapses becomes a waiting time, and there is a possibility that the waiting time reduces the attention to the game.

Therefore, in the specific re-game bet effect setting process, if it is determined in step S3422 that it is in the wait period, the pseudo bet permission flag is set in the flag storage area 183a in step S3430, and then the process proceeds to step S3406. A process for performing a betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is executed. In other words, during the wait period, even if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is performed, so that the above waiting time is compensated for by the effect. becomes possible.

Furthermore, in performing the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect during the wait period, after the first bet display section 34a is turned on, until the bet timer becomes 0 and affirmative determination is made in step S3412, (Step S3412: NO) At step S3431, it is determined whether the pseudo-bet permission flag is set or whether a new start operation command has been received, and if either is the case, the process proceeds to step S3432. In step S3432, it is determined whether or not the wait period has passed, and if it has not passed, the process returns to step S3412. It should be noted that even if the pseudo bet permission flag is not set in step S3431 and a new start operation command is not received, the process returns to step S3412.

On the other hand, if the pseudo bet permission flag is set or the start operation command is newly received and the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3427, and the second bet display section 34b or the third bet display section 34c is executed. is turned on.

In addition, after the second bet display section 34b is turned on, the pseudo bet permission flag is set in step S3433 until the bet timer becomes 0 and an affirmative determination is made in step S3417 (step S3417: NO). or whether a new start operation command has been received, and if either, the flow advances to step S3434 to determine whether or not the wait period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S3433 or if the wait period has not elapsed in step S3434, the process returns to step S3412. Then, in step S3434, when the pseudo bet permission flag is set or when a start operation command is newly received, and the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3429, and the third bet display section 34c is turned on. Execute the process to set the state.

In other words, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, or if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the betting process effect will be interrupted with the lapse of the wait period, and the bet corresponding effect will be performed as it is. was made to take place. By doing so, even if the start operation is performed without betting operation or the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the betting process effect can be performed while expecting the effect of the pseudo-bet effect. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by doing.

<Setting processing for bet-compatible effects>
In step S3205, the processing for setting the effect corresponding to bet is similar to the processing in steps S3423 to S3429. That is, after all the bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned off, the bet display portions 34a to 34c corresponding to the bet number set in the replay state are turned on. In this case, even if the replay state is based on the winning of a specific replay result, the replay state is set without the bet amount operation, instead of performing the bet corresponding effect after the betting process effect is performed based on the bet amount operation. At this time, a bet corresponding production is executed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably avoid a phenomenon in which the AT winning notification effect executed based on the bet number operation overlaps with the betting process effect or the bet corresponding effect.

<BET display section and BET display section>
Next, the relationship between the bet display section 75 on the main control device 101 side, the bet display section 34 on the display control device 81 side, the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the presence or absence of lighting is shown in FIGS. Description will be made with reference to timing charts. In FIGS. 69 and 70, the explanation is based on the assumption that both games are progressing as 3-bet games and the credit counter is basically 3 or more.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop rotating at t1 in a game with a small combination result, medals corresponding to the small combination result are paid out. When the payout of medals ends at t2, the first credit lamp 56b switches from the off state to the on state, and it is notified that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is ready to be accepted. At this timing, the acceptable state display section 76c is also switched from the off state to the on state (not shown). When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t3, the BET display section 75 and the BET display section 34 are temporarily switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. Then, at t4, t5, and t6, the first BET display portion 75a and the first BET display portion 34a, the second BET display portion 75b and the second BET display portion 34b, the third BET display portion 75c and the third BET display portion 34c, respectively. are switched from the off state to the lit state, and a bet sound effect is output at the timing of switching to each lit state. The series of effects from t3 to t6 corresponds to the betting process effect in the normal bet effect. Equivalent to corresponding production. The interval between bets in the betting process effect in the normal bet effect is approximately 0.1 sec as described above.

When the betting is completed at t6, the start possible state display portion 76b switches from the off state to the on state, and becomes ready to accept the start operation. After the wait period has elapsed at t7, when the start lever 41 is operated at t8 to perform a start operation, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Note that the lottery process is being executed based on the start operation at t8, and the result of this lottery is a loss result.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at t9, as described above, the result is a loss, and medals are not paid out. In this case, at t9, the first credit lamp 56b switches from the off state to the on state, and it is notified that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 can be accepted. Incidentally, even if the winning of the small combination is not established when the small combination is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on. Incidentally, when a freeze period for effect is provided after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the lighting state after the medals are paid out after the freeze period has elapsed. . Further, when no medals are paid out, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the lighting state after the freeze period has elapsed.

When the first credit input switch 56 is operated at t10, the BET display sections 75a to 75c and the BET display sections 34a to 34c are turned off, and then at t11 to t13, the BET display sections 75a to 75c and each A bet process effect is executed in which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially switched to the lighting state.

When the betting is completed at t13, the start possible state display portion 76b is switched to the lighting state, and when the start lever 41 is operated at t14, the lottery processing based on the start operation is executed, but the wait is still performed at t14. Since it is during the period, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not start rotating at t14. In this case, at t15 when the wait period elapses, rotation processing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the start operation at t14 is executed. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t14 is the normal replay result.

It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating at t15, and after the wait period has passed at t16, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop rotating at t17. In this case, the result of the lottery process performed at t14 as described above is the normal re-game result, and when the normal re-game win is established at t17, the re-game state display section 76a is displayed by the re-game setting process. The light-off state is switched to the light-on state, and the virtual tokens are automatically inserted. That is, at t17, the replay state display section 76a is turned on, and at t17, the BET display section 75 and the bet display section 34 are temporarily switched from the lighting state to the off state, and then at t18, t19, and t20. , the first bet display portion 75a and the first bet display portion 34a, the second bet display portion 75b and the second bet display portion 34b, the third bet display portion 75c and the third bet display portion 34c are switched from the off state to the on state in sequence. , a bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each lighting state. The series of effects from t17 to t20 corresponds to the betting process effect in the replay betting effect, and the state in which the BET display portions 75a to 75c and the bet display portions 34a to 34c are lit at t20. This corresponds to a bet-compatible production. The interval between bets in the betting process effect in the replay betting effect is about 0.2 sec as described above, which is longer than the interval between bets in the betting process effect in the normal betting effect. Incidentally, when a freeze period for effect is provided after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops, the replay state display section 76a is turned on after the freeze period has elapsed, and virtual medals are automatically inserted. processing takes place.

When the betting by the replay setting process is completed at t20, the start possible state display portion 76b is switched to the lighting state. At this timing, the acceptable state display section 76c is also switched from the off state to the on state (not shown). When the start operation is performed at t21, the lottery process is executed and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t21 is the normal replay result.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t22, the lottery result of the current game is the normal replay result as described above, and the replay state display section 76a is displayed from t22 to t25 as in the case of t17. and a betting process effect in a replay bet effect in which the BET display portions 75a to 75c and the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially switched to the lighting state. In this case, although the wait period has not passed at t22, the normal bet effect is executed regardless of whether the wait period has passed or not, and the normal bet effect is performed in the same manner before and after the wait period has passed. Due to the configuration, the betting process effect from t17 to t20 and the betting process effect from t22 to t25 are executed in the same mode.

Then, when the betting is completed at t25, the start possible state display portion 76b is switched to the lighting state, and after that, the wait period elapses at t26. When the start operation is performed at t27, the lottery process is executed and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t27 is also the normal replay result.

At t28, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and at t28 to t31, lighting processing of the replay state display section 76a and betting process effects by the BET display sections 75a to 75c and the bet display sections 34a to 34c are performed. executed. Further, at t31, the start possible state display portion 76b is switched to the lighting state. Unlike the start operation at t27, the start operation at t32 is the start operation before the wait period elapses. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R do not start rotating at t32 when the start operation is performed, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating at t33 when the wait period elapses.

Next, the relationship between the operation of the BET display section 75, the BET display section 34, the first credit insertion switch 56, etc. and the presence/absence of lighting in the case of a specific re-game result will be described.

As shown in FIG. 70, in a game in which a specific replay result is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t42 after t41 when the wait period elapses. In this case, at t42, the replaying state display section 76a is turned on, and the BET display sections 75a to 75c are turned off. Lighting processing of each of the BET display portions 75a to 75c is performed so that the number of bets is obtained. That is, in the specific re-game result, an effect corresponding to the betting process effect by the BET display units 75a to 75c on the main control device 101 side is not executed, and a bet corresponding effect is performed. However, in the case of a specific regame result, the lighting processing of the BET display units 75a to 75c on the main control device 101 side and the pseudo bet effect by the bet display units 34a to 34c on the display control device 81 side are not interlocked, and at t43. Even if the BET display portions 75a to 75c are displayed corresponding to the bet number of the current game, the bet display portions 34a to 34c continue the bet corresponding effects corresponding to the previous bet number.

Further, at t43, the BET display portions 75a to 75c are turned on, and the first credit lamp 56b is also turned on, so that the operation of the first credit input switch 56 is prompted. Further, since the betting is completed at t43, the start possible state display portion 76b is also turned on. In this case, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t44, a pseudo-bet effect is performed by the bet display units 34a-34c at t44-t47. That is, at t44, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the off state, and then at t45, t46, and t47, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially displayed. Each of the display portions 34c switches from the off state to the on state, and a bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each of the on states. The series of effects from t44 to t47 corresponds to the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, and the state in which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are lit at t47 corresponds to the bet correspondence effect. The interval between bets in the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is approximately 0.1 sec as described above, which is the same length as the interval between bets in the betting process effect in the normal bet effect. The length is set to be shorter than the interval between each bet in the betting process presentation.

After that, when the start operation is performed at t48, since the wait period has already passed, the lottery process is executed at t48, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. . The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t48 is also the specific re-game result.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t49, the lottery result of the current game is the specific replay result as described above, and the replay state display section 76a is displayed from t49 to t50 as in the case of t42. , a process of turning on the start possible state display section 76b and the first credit lamp 56b, and a process of temporarily turning off the BET display sections 75a to 75c and then switching them to a lighting state. Incidentally, as for the replay state display section 76a, since the game result of the previous game was also the replay result win, the replay state display section 76a continues to be lit at t50. Note that at t50, the light may be turned off once, and then immediately thereafter turned on again.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t52, which is after the wait period has passed at t51, a pseudo A betting performance is performed. That is, at t52, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state, and then at t53, t54, and t55, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially displayed. Each of the display portions 34c switches from the off state to the on state, and a bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each of the on states.

After that, when the start operation is performed at t56, since the wait period has already passed, the lottery process is executed at t56, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. . The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t56 is also the specific re-game result.

As described above, in the replay state based on the winning of a specific replay result, the pseudo bet effect based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is a bet for effect, and the bet has already been made in the replay setting process. Completed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the start operation without operating the first credit insertion switch 56 to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

That is, at t57, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and at t57 to t58, the replay state display section 76a, the start possible state display section 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on. A process of switching the display portions 75a to 75c to the lighted state after temporarily turning the light off state is performed. After the wait period has passed at t59, if the start operation is performed at t60 without operating the first credit input switch 56, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at t60. . In this case, after the bet display portions 34a to 34c are once turned off at t60, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned on at t61. At t61, no bet effect sound is output. That is, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, if the start operation is performed without the bet number operation, the execution of the betting process effect is restricted and the bet corresponding effect is immediately executed. . By doing so, the player feels uncomfortable because the betting process effect is not completed (executed) even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate. can be prevented.

It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation at t60, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific re-game result. After the wait period has passed at t62, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t63, the replay state display section 76a, the start possible state display section 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on at t63 to t64. A process for turning on the BET display portions 75a to 75c and a process for turning off the BET display portions 75a to 75c once and then switching to the lighted state are performed.

After that, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t65, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above. That is, at t65, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the off state, and then at t66, the first bet display portion 34a is switched to the lit state, and a bet effect sound is output.

At t67, before the period (approximately 0.1 sec) elapses from when the first bet display portion 34a is turned on to when the next second bet display portion 34b is turned on, the game starts. When the start operation is performed with the lever 41, the wait period has already passed and the bet on the main controller 101 side has been completed. rotation is started. In this case, the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect started at t66 is limited in the middle by the start operation at t67, and is switched to the bet corresponding effect at t67. By doing so, the player feels uncomfortable because the betting process effect is not completed (executed) even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate. can be prevented.

It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation at t67, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific re-game result. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t68, at t68 to t69, the replay state display section 76a, the start possible state display section 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on, and each BET display is performed. A process of switching the portions 75a to 75c to the lighting state after temporarily turning them off is performed.

After that, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t70, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above because the wait period has not yet passed. That is, at t70, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the off state, and then at t71, t72, and t74, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially displayed. Each of the display portions 34c switches from the off state to the on state, and a bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each of the on states.

Furthermore, even if the start operation is performed by the start lever 41 at t73 during the betting process rendering in the pseudo bet rendering, the betting process rendering is still in the waiting period at t73. is continued. Then, at t75 when the wait period elapses, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating. In this way, even if the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering of the pseudo-bet rendering, the betting process rendering is continued if it is during the waiting period. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a period during which the performance is not performed even though there is a waiting period such as a wait period.

However, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect before the wait period elapses, even if the betting process effect is continued, the wait period elapses before the end of the betting process effect. In some cases. In this case, when the wait period has passed, the bet process effect is terminated and switched to the bet corresponding effect.

That is, it is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation at t75, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific re-game result. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t76, at t76 to t77, the replay state display section 76a, the start possible state display section 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on, and each BET display is performed. A process of switching the portions 75a to 75c to the lighting state after temporarily turning them off is performed.

After that, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t78, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above because the wait period has not yet passed. That is, at t78, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the off state, and then at t79 and t81, the first bet display unit 34a and the second bet display unit 34b are turned on from the off state. A bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each lighting state. Further, even if the start operation is performed by the start lever 41 at t80 during the betting process rendering in the pseudo bet rendering, the betting process rendering is still in the waiting period at t80. is continued.

Then, after the second bet display section 34b is switched to the lighting state at t81, before the period (about 0.1 sec) elapses until the next third bet display section 34c is turned on. When the wait period elapses at t82, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating at t82. In this case, the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect started at t78 is limited midway by the start operation at t81 and the elapse of the wait period at t82, and is switched to the bet corresponding effect at t82.

<Waiting state setting processing>
Next, the standby state setting process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The standby state setting process is a process for setting the slot machine 10 to a standby state (demonstration state) when a game has not been played for a predetermined period of time. This is the process to be performed.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not any game operation provided in the slot machine 10 has been performed based on the detection results of various sensors. Specifically, it corresponds to the operation of the operation units such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, the first credit input switch 56, the second credit input switch 57, the settlement switch 59, etc., which are connected to the main controller 101. In addition to detection by the detection sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 56a, 57a, 59a, etc., insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45 (detection of medals by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a), opening of the front door 12, etc. If so, an affirmative determination is made in step S3501.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501 and no game operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S3502 to determine whether or not any reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating. If any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, it is determined in step S3503 whether medals are being paid out. If no medals have been paid out, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the replay state is set. As described above, the replay state is a state set by the replay setting processing based on any replay result win. If it is not in the replay state, the process advances to step S3504 to execute processing for setting a permission flag for permitting the counting of the standby counter provided in the various counter areas 106e to the various flag storage area 106d. The standby counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the timing at which the standby state should be set.

If it is determined in step S3501 that any game operation has been performed, the process advances to step S3505 to execute processing for clearing the standby counter to the initial value (120800). After the process of step S3505 is executed, or if an affirmative determination is made in any one of steps S3502 to S3503, a process of clearing the permission flag is executed in step S3506. In this case, in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17), the wait counter is decremented by one on the condition that the permission flag is set. If not, the process of subtracting the standby counter is not performed. Since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 1.49 msec, it takes about 3 minutes for the standby counter to become 0 from the initial value.

After executing the processing of step S3504 or step S3506, it is determined whether or not any game operation has been performed in step S3507. Such processing is similar to the processing in step S3501. Then, if it is determined that no game operation has been performed by making a negative determination in step S3507, the standby counter becomes 0 in step S3508, and a predetermined period of time (approximately 3 minutes) until the standby state is established. determines whether or not has elapsed. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not passed, the standby state setting process is terminated.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed, processing for setting the present slot machine 10 to the standby state is executed in steps S3509 to S3514. That is, in step S3509, a process of setting the standby transition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The standby shift command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the standby state is to be set.

In the subsequent step S3510, front lights for illuminating the reels 32L, 32M and 32R from the outside, backlight for illuminating the reels 32L, 32M and 32R from the inside, and a backlight for the game panel 25 provided inside the game panel 25 The lighting/extinguishing state of the backlight is stored in the standby storage area 106c of the RAM 106, and the process of extinguishing these lights to put them in a standby state is executed. If the front light or backlight has already been turned off, that state is maintained.

In the following step S3511, the information displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is stored in the standby storage area 106c, and each segment of these display sections 60 to 62 is stored. is turned off and a process of waiting is executed. In step S3512, the information displayed on the instruction monitor 68 is stored in the standby storage area 106c of the RAM 106, and each segment of the instruction monitor 68 is turned off to put it in a standby state.

In the subsequent step S3513, a process of storing the information displayed on the BET display unit 75 in the standby storage area 106c is executed, and each BET display unit 75a to 75c of the BET display unit 75 is turned off to enter the standby state. Execute the processing to be performed.

Then, in step S3514, when the start possible state display portion 76b of the gaming state display portion 76 is in a lighting state, the lighting information is stored in the standby storage area 106c, and then the start possible state display portion 76b is executed. After executing the processing for turning off the state display section 76b, the standby state setting processing is terminated.

In this way, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, no payout is performed, and the game is not replayed, the period during which no game operation is performed is longer than or equal to the predetermined period. Thus, the slot machine 10 is set to the standby state. In the standby state, the power consumption of the slot machine 10 can be reduced because various display units and the like are turned off. In this case, since the standby counter is not counted in the replay state as described above, the standby state is not entered even if the game operation or the like is not performed. In addition, even in the standby state, if the standby state is set in a state in which at least the bet operation is possible, the acceptable state display section 76c is maintained in the lighting state, so that the power supply is turned on even in the standby state. The player can clearly distinguish the state from the state in which the is not inserted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3507 that any game operation has been performed, the process advances to step S3515 to determine whether or not the current state is set to the standby state. If the standby state is not set, the standby state setting process is terminated. If it is set to the standby state, in steps S3516 to S3521, return processing for returning from the standby state to the normal state is executed.

That is, in step S3516, a process of setting the return-to-standby command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The standby return command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the standby state is to return to the normal state.

In subsequent step S3517, various front light and backlight recovery processes are executed. In the return processing, the state of various front lights and backlights before transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and processing is performed to return to that state (lighting state or extinguished state).

In the following step S3518, the states of the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 before transition to the standby state are grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and the state (lighting state or light-out state) is restored. process to cause Further, in step S3519, the state of the instruction monitor 68 before transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and processing is performed to return to that state (lighting state or extinguishing state).

In the following step S3520, the state of the BET display section 75 before transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and processing for returning to that state (lighting state or light-out state) is performed.

Then, in step S3521, the state before transition to the standby state of the start possible state display portion 76b of the game state display portion 76 is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and the state (lighting state or light-out state) is restored. After performing the processing, the standby state setting processing ends.

<Standby processing>
Next, standby processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The standby process corresponds to the above-described standby state setting process on the main controller 101 side, and is a process executed as one of the other processes (step S2011) in the effect setting process (FIG. 51). It performs processing for shifting to the standby state, returning to the normal state, and processing for shifting to the temporary standby state before shifting to the standby state.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the standby transition command has been received. If the standby transition command has been received, standby processing for setting the auxiliary display section 65 to the standby mode is executed in step S3602. Specifically, the content currently displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is stored in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183, and the brightness of the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 is set to be lower than the normal brightness for the standby mode. and display characters such as "demonstration state". In subsequent step S3603, processing is executed to set the output volume from the speaker 64 to a standby mode volume that is smaller than the normal volume (or is not output).

In the following step S3604, standby processing of the bet display unit 34 is executed. Specifically, the process of storing the contents currently displayed on the bet display section 34 in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183 and turning off the bet display sections 34a to 34c of the bet display section 34 is performed. Execute. In the subsequent step S3605, standby processing for the first credit lamp 56b is executed. Specifically, the lighting/extinguishing state of the first credit lamp 56b is grasped, this content is stored in the standby storage area 183c, and the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed. When the first credit lamp 56b is already in the off state, the extinguished state is maintained only by storing the information.

If a negative determination is made in step S3601, it is determined in step S3606 whether or not the standby return command has been received. If the standby return command has been received, in step S3607 a return process is executed to return the auxiliary display section 65 in the standby mode to the normal state. Specifically, the contents displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 before transition to the standby state are grasped from the standby storage area 183c, and the contents are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Execute processing to return the brightness of the screen to normal brightness. Also, in step S3608, a process of setting the output volume from the speaker 64 to the normal output volume is executed.

In the following step S3609, a recovery process for the bet display section 34 is executed. Specifically, the display content of the bet display section 34 before transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 183c, and processing is executed so that the content is displayed on the bet display section 34 . Also, in step S3610, a process for resetting the first credit lamp 56b is executed. Specifically, whether or not the first credit lamp 56b was in the lighting state before shifting to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 183c, and if it was in the lighting state, the first credit lamp 56b is in the lighting state, If the light has been turned off before transitioning to the standby state, a process for maintaining that state is executed.

After executing the process of step S3605 or step S3610, or when a negative determination is made in step S3606, the process proceeds to step S3611. The processing of steps S3611 to S3622 is processing for a temporary standby state prior to the standby state.

Specifically, it is determined in step S3611 whether or not one game has ended. If medals are to be paid out at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the payout has been completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3611 and the game ends, the process advances to step S3612 to set a permission flag for permitting the display continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 183b to count in the various flag storage areas 183a. to run. The display continuation counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing at which the temporary standby state should be set. Note that the display continuation counter has an initial value (15000), and it takes 30 seconds for the display continuation counter to become 0 after the processing of step S3612.

If it is determined in step S3611 that the game has not ended, or after executing the process of step S3612, the process proceeds to step S3613 to determine whether or not any game operation has been performed. In this case, a detection sensor corresponding to the operation of the operation unit such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion switch 57, the settlement switch 59, etc. connected to the main control unit 101 Commands output when detected by 41a, 42a to 44a, 56a, 57a, 59a, etc., insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45 (detection of medals by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a), opening of the front door 12, etc. In addition to the case where the command output when is performed is received, also when the operation of the effect switch 66 connected to the display control device 81 is performed, the affirmative determination is made in step S3613.

If a negative determination is made in step S3613 and no game operation has been performed, the flow advances to step S3614 to determine whether or not the display continuation counter has reached zero. If the display continuation counter has not reached 0, the standby process is terminated. In this case, in other processing (step S2011) in the effect setting processing (FIG. 51), the display continuation counter is decremented by one on the condition that the permission flag is set, and the permission flag is set. If not, the process of subtracting the display continuation counter is not performed. Since the effect setting process is started at a cycle of 2 msec, it takes about 30 sec for the display continuation counter to become 0 from the initial value.

When the display continuation counter becomes 0 in step S3614 and the period until the temporary standby state has elapsed, it is determined in step S3615 whether or not the game is in the replay state. In the replay state, if no game operation has been performed for 30 seconds as the first transition period until transition to the temporary standby state after winning any of the replay results, in step S3616, the first After executing the temporary standby process for the credit lamp 56b, the main standby process is terminated. Regarding step S3616, specifically, the lighting/extinguishing state of the first credit lamp 56b is grasped, this content is stored in the standby storage area 183c, and the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed. . When the first credit lamp 56b is already in the off state, the extinguished state is maintained only by storing the information.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3515 that the game is not in the replay state, then in step S3517 the bet display section 34 performs temporary standby processing, and then this standby processing ends. Regarding step S3517, specifically, the contents currently displayed on the bet display section 34 are stored in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183, and the bet display sections 34a to 34c of the bet display section 34 are turned off. Execute the process to be.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3614 and it is determined that any game operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3618. In step S3618, processing for clearing the display continuation counter to the initial value (15000) is executed. Then, in step S3619, the process of clearing the permission flag is executed, and the measurement of the display continuation counter ends.

In subsequent step S3620, it is determined whether or not the current temporary standby state is set. If it is in the temporary standby state, in steps S3621 and S3622, the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are restored, and then the standby processing is terminated. Such processing is the same as the processing in steps S3609 and S3610 described above.

That is, in the display control device 81, in addition to the normal state and the standby state, the temporary standby state is set as the state for effect. The standby state corresponds to the standby state managed by the main controller 101 side, and is shifted when about 3 minutes have elapsed since the game operation was stopped. The temporary standby state is a state managed by the display control device 81, and is entered when about 30 seconds elapse without any game operation after the game ends.

In this case, if no game operation is performed after the game ends, the game is shifted to the temporary standby state after about 30 seconds, and then shifted to the standby state after about 3 minutes. When shifting to the temporary standby state, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off if the game is in the replay state, and the bet display section 34 is turned off if the game is not in the replay state. When shifting to the standby state, not only the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b, but also the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are set to the standby mode. If some game operation is performed after the game is over, the standby state is entered about 3 minutes after the game operation is performed without going through the temporary standby state. That is, after about 3 minutes, the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are also set to the standby mode. However, the standby state is not set in the replay state.

<State of temporary standby state and standby state>
How the temporary standby state and the standby state are set after the game will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. Incidentally, FIG. 73(a) shows the state after the result of the normal replay, FIG. 73(b) shows the state after the result of the small winning combination, and FIG. 73(c) shows the state after the result of the specific replay. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), when the lottery result of the game started at ta1 is the normal replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at ta2, the normal replay result wins. It is set to the replay state based on. In this case, the BET display unit 75 and the BET display unit 34 are once turned off at ta2, and then turned on again corresponding to the same bet number as the bet number at ta1. It should be noted that the betting process rendering is omitted in this figure. Also, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at the start (betting number operation) at ta1, and is maintained in the turned-off state in the replay state.

As described above, in the replay state, when the temporary standby state is set, the temporary standby processing of the first credit lamp 56b is performed, but the temporary standby processing of the bet display section 34 is not performed. Also, in the replay state, the standby state is not set.

In the replay state based on the normal replay result, the bet display section 34 is turned on with the bet correspondence effect, but the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. Therefore, at ta3 when the first transition period (TA) from ta2 to the transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the bet display section 34 is kept lit and the first credit lamp 56b is kept turned off. be.

Even at ta4 when the second transition period (TB) from ta2 to the transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is not set because it is in the replay state. Therefore, at ta4, the bet display section 34 is kept lit, and the first credit lamp 56b is kept lit. Further, the lighting state of the BET display portion 75 is maintained, and the auxiliary display portion 65 does not shift to the standby mode.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), if the lottery result of the game started at ta11 is one of the small winning combination results, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at tb2, the small winning combination result wins. can be established. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta12.

As described above, when the temporary standby state is set in a state other than the replay state, the temporary standby processing of the bet display section 34 is performed while the temporary standby processing of the first credit lamp 56b is not performed. Also, except for the replay state, the game is set to the standby state.

If no game operation is performed until ta13, in which the first transition period (TA) from ta12 to transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the temporary standby state is set at ta13. In this case, although the first credit lamp 56b remains lit, the bet display section 34 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state.

If no game operation is performed from ta12 to ta14 when the second transition period (TB) from ta12 to the standby state elapses, the standby state is set at ta14. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off, the BET display section 75 is also turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode.

When the lottery result of the game started at ta15 is also one of the small combination results, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at ta16, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta16.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at ta17, which is the period from ta16 to ta18 where the first transition period (TA) from ta16 to transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the corresponding bet is is performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In addition, although it is in the replay state, setting of the temporary standby state is not performed by the bet number operation of ta17, and even if it becomes ta18, the bet display unit 34 maintains the lighting state corresponding to the bet number operation of ta17. be. If no game operation is performed until ta19 when the second transition period (TB) from ta17 bet operation to transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is set at ta19. In this case, not only the first credit lamp 56b, which has already been turned off, but also the bet display section 34 and the bet display section 75 are turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), when the lottery result of the game started at ta21 is a specific replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at ta22, the specific replay result wins. It is set to the replay state based on. In this case, the BET display unit 75 is once turned off at ta22, and then turned on again corresponding to the same bet number as the bet number at ta21. As described above, at ta22, the pseudo bet effect of the bet display section 34 is not performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on.

As described above, in the replay state, when the temporary standby state is set, the temporary standby processing of the first credit lamp 56b is performed, but the temporary standby processing of the bet display section 34 is not performed. Also, in the replay state, the standby state is not set.

Therefore, at ta23 when the first transition period (TA) from ta22 to the transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state, while the bet display section 34 remains lit. be. At ta24 when the second transition period (TB) from ta22 to the transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is not set. Therefore, the lighting state of the bet display section 34 is maintained. Further, the lighting state of the BET display portion 75 is maintained, and the auxiliary display portion 65 does not shift to the standby mode.

When the lottery result of the game started at ta25 is also a specific replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at ta22, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta26.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at ta27, which is a period from ta26 to ta28 in which the first transition period (TA) from ta26 to transition to the temporary standby state elapses, a pseudo-bet effect is performed. is performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In this case, even if ta28 is reached, the provisional standby state is not set by the bet operation of ta27, and the bet display section 34 maintains the bet correspondence effect of the pseudo bet effect corresponding to the bet amount operation of ta27.

Since the replay state does not shift to the standby state, no game operation is performed until ta29 when the second transition period (TB) elapses from ta27 bet operation to transition to the standby state. Even so, the lighting state of the BET display section 34 is maintained at ta29, the lighting state of the BET display section 75 is also maintained, and the auxiliary display section 65 does not shift to the standby mode.

That is, in the specific replay result, the small combination result, and the loss result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. Although the bet effects (regular bet effect and pseudo bet effect) by the bet display unit 34 are the same in the case of the bet display unit 34, whether or not it is set to the temporary standby state or the standby state is different. If no game operation is performed over the first transition period, a temporary standby state is set, and the bet display section 34 is turned off although the first credit lamp 56b remains lit. After the result of the specific replay, if no game operation is performed for the first transition period, the bet display unit 34 is set to the temporary standby state and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. is maintained. In other words, by not performing the game operation over the first transition period, it is possible to determine whether the specific re-game result or the small win result or the like is obtained based on whether or not the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display section 34 are turned off. It is possible.

In this case, if the game operation is performed before the first transition period elapses, the first transition period elapses after the game operation, regardless of whether the specific re-game result or the small win result. is not set to the temporary standby state, and it is possible to determine whether it was a specific replay result or a small combination result by whether or not the standby state is set when the second transition period has passed from the game operation. . In other words, in order to determine which result was obtained from whether or not the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display section 34 are turned off, it is necessary to suspend the game for at least the first transition period. It is possible to realize a novel game property such as determining the result by not performing the game operation immediately.

The embodiment described in detail above has the following excellent effects.

In the replay state set based on the winning of a specific replay result, when a bet amount operation such as operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45 is performed, A pseudo-bet effect is performed in which a bet-corresponding effect is performed after the bet process effect. By doing so, even in the replay state, the flow of the series of game operations of the slot machine 10, such as performing the start operation after the bet number operation and performing the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, is not changed. , can be played. In addition, by doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the results are treated in the same way as the results of small wins and the results of losing, and normal replays are performed through the betting process effect without going through the bet number operation, and then the bet corresponding effect is performed. From the difference from the result, it is possible to impart an expectation that some kind of privilege can be obtained even if the result is a replay. Therefore, it can be used to improve the interest of the game.

In the replay betting effect based on the win of the normal replay result, a betting process effect in which bets are placed at intervals of 0.2 sec is executed, and then switched to the bet correspondence effect. A betting process effect in which a bet is placed at intervals of 0.1 sec is executed, and then switched to a bet-corresponding effect. By doing so, the player is given an impression that the specific replay result and the normal replay result are clearly different from not only the mode of operation for progressing the game but also the mode of notification of the bet effect. becomes possible.

In the re-game state based on the specific re-game result win, the bet itself has already been completed in the re-game setting processing, and the start possible state display section 76b is lit. Therefore, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect based on the bet operation, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can start rotating even during the betting process effect. Therefore, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo-betting effect after the betting operation is performed, the betting process effect is interrupted as a limiting process of the betting process effect, and the bet is handled at that point. I switched to directing. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity due to the fact that the bet correspondence effect is not performed although the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate based on the start operation. It is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load and player confusion due to overlapping of the effect and processing at the start of rotation and the betting process effect and processing therefor.

However, even if the start operation is during the betting process presentation, if the start operation is during the waiting period, the betting process presentation is not interrupted and is executed as it is. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the betting process effect is interrupted even when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not start rotating.

If the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering and the betting process rendering is continued without interruption because the waiting period has not yet elapsed, and the waiting period has elapsed after the fact, the waiting period will continue. When , the betting process presentation is interrupted and switched to a betting corresponding presentation. By doing so, the betting process effect is not completed even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate, and inconvenience due to duplication of effects and processes is prevented. It becomes possible to

Furthermore, even in the replay state based on the winning of a specific replay result, the start operation can be performed without going through the bet operation. performs a bet correspondence presentation based on the bet number operation without executing the betting process presentation in the pseudo-bet presentation. As a result, it is possible to eliminate an increase in the processing load due to unnecessary effects, and even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate based on the start operation, the bet correspondence notification can be made. is not performed.

Here, the specific re-game result is defined as a re-game result other than the first re-game result. A game result that is duplicated with the second re-game result and the third re-game result as the specific re-game result is also set. In this case, in the above-described embodiment, which of the first re-game result and the second and third re-game results is established is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 (FIG. 39). In the normal mode, basically, the setting is made so that the first re-game result win as the normal re-game result is easily established, and when the AT mode is started, the second re-game result win or the second re-game result win as the specific re-game result is set. 3 It is set so that the replay result wins easily. In other words, it is set so that there are cases where the replay bet effect is performed and cases where the pseudo bet effect is performed depending on the situation when the normal replies A to C are won. In this way, even in the replay state, by clearly distinguishing between the scene where the bet operation is unnecessary and the scene where the bet operation is desired, the effect of intentionally making the bet operation in the replay state. can be suitably expected.

In particular, when the normal replays A to C are won, the second re-game result or the third re-game result as the specific re-game result is won and the pseudo-bet effect is performed, the AT mode is started. Therefore, when a new AT mode is started, by performing a series of game operations such as a bet number operation and then a start operation, a new feeling can be created without being influenced by the previous game. It is also possible to help the user switch to the AT mode, and the interest in the AT mode can be enhanced.

Further, in the replay state based on the specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56 is turned on, and is turned off after the first transition period elapses. On the other hand, after the result of the small winning combination, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, but the lighting state is maintained even after the first transition period elapses. In this manner, the first credit lamp 56 is turned on, or a pseudo bet effect is performed based on the bet number operation, thereby giving the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as the result of the minor winning combination. It is possible to realize a novel game property such that if it is attempted to determine both results while giving, it is sufficient to wait until the first transition period elapses. In addition, the player who ends the game even though the specific re-game result win has been established can be notified by turning off the first credit lamp 56b. After the lapse of the first transition period, it becomes difficult for subsequent players to perceive that the specific re-game result win has been established, and it is possible to contribute to the fairness of the game.

Moreover, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state regardless of whether the result is a specific regame result or a small win result. Then, if both results are to be discriminated by the passage of the first transition period, it becomes necessary not to operate the first credit insertion switch 56, and in terms of game characteristics in which the result can be discerned by waiting, especially the first It is possible to provide a game property that requires stricter waiting, such as not to operate the one-credit input switch 56, so that the amusement of such a game property can be favorably improved. In other words, even if any game operation is performed, the setting of the temporary standby state is not performed, but if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, not only the determination in the temporary standby state but also the determination in the standby state will be performed. be unable to do so. It should be noted that operating the first credit insertion switch 56 can be interpreted as an indication of intention to continue the game. It is considered unlikely to occur.

With respect to the bet display section 34, when the first transition period has passed, the lighted state is switched to the lighted state in the case of a specific re-game result, while the lighted state is maintained in the case of a small win result. After the result of the small winning combination, when the second transition period elapses, the standby state is set and the bet display part 34 is turned off, while in the replay state, the standby state is not set even after the second transition period elapses. . Therefore, although the bet display section 34 is turned off after the result of the small winning combination, the bet display section 34 is kept turned on when the game is ended while the specific re-game winning is established. . In this way, by confirming the bet display section 34, it is possible to clearly determine that the replay result has been won, so that the manager of the gaming hall closes the hall in that state. can be preferably avoided.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, regarding another aspect when the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering, the relationship between the lighting rendering in which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially lit in the betting process rendering and the betting sound effect. A modification of 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. FIG.

FIG. 74(a) shows the betting process rendering of the above embodiment.

When the number of bets is operated at tb1, a lighting effect is executed in which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially lit, and a betting process effect is executed in which a betting sound effect is output. When the betting process effect is completed at tb2, a bet corresponding effect is provided. After that, when a start operation is performed at tb3, a lottery process is performed and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. When the result of the lottery process is the specific re-game result, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at tb4 and the specific re-game result win is established, the bet is set by the re-game setting process. will be

At tb6, which is after tb5 when the wait period elapses, when the number of bets is operated by the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are accompanied by bet sound effects as in the case of tb1. is started. However, this betting process effect is a betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect.

When the start operation is performed at tb7, which is before tb8 when the betting process effect started at tb6 is completed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, and in this case, the betting process effect is started. At tb7, the effect is switched to bet correspondence (corresponding bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned on). That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the start operation is performed in the middle of the betting process presentation in the pseudo betting presentation, both the lighting presentation and the sound effect presentation in the betting process presentation are interrupted in the middle and switched to the betting corresponding presentation. It is configured to be restricted by

FIG. 75 shows a modification of the specific regame bet effect setting process. In this modification, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect of the pseudo bet effect, part of the effect of the betting process effect is performed. execution is restricted.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the process when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect is different from the process shown in FIG. In this modification, the processes of steps S3714, S3720, S3735 and S3738 are added, and other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in FIG.

That is, in the state of waiting until the second bet display portion 34b is turned on, it is determined in step S3733 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step S3734. If it is determined that there is, in step S3735, a process of setting a limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process returns to step S3712 and waits until the bet timer reaches zero. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, and the second bet display section 34b is turned on in step S3713. Then, in step S3714, it is determined whether or not the limit flag is set, and if it is not set, in step S3715, a betting effect sound is output, and then in step S3716. The process proceeds to the process of lighting the 3-bet display section 34c. On the other hand, if the restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3716 without outputting the bet sound effect.

In addition, in the state of waiting until the third bet display portion 34c is turned on, it is determined in step S3736 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and in step S3737 the wait period has passed. If it is determined that the bet timer is set to 0, in step S3738, a process of setting a limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process returns to step S3718 and waits until the bet timer reaches zero. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3718, and the third bet display section 34c is turned on in step S3719. Then, in step S3720, it is determined whether or not the limit flag is set, and if it is not set, in step S3721, a process of outputting a bet effect sound is executed, and then a specific replay bet is executed. End the effect setting process. On the other hand, when the restriction flag is set, the specific regame bet effect setting process is terminated without outputting the bet sound effect.

FIG. 74(b) shows how, when a start operation is performed in the middle of the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect, execution of a part of the effect in the betting process effect is restricted.

tb11 to tb16 are the same as the above tb1 to tb6, and bets are made in the regame setting process associated with winning a specific regame result, and after the wait period has passed, the bet operation is performed at tb16. do. In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb16. When the start operation is performed at tb17, which is before tb18 when the betting process effect is completed, the lighting effect of the bet display portions 34a to 34c is continuously performed, but the sound effect at the time of betting is output accordingly. is restricted. As a result, in the betting process effect started at tb16, the lighting effect is executed from tb16 to tb18, but the betting sound effect is executed from tb16 to tb17 and is not executed from tb17 to tb18. Then, at tb18, the effect is switched to bet correspondence. By doing so, it is possible to avoid overlapping with the processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at least for the processing for outputting the sound effect at the time of betting. It is also possible to eliminate duplication of the sound effect and the sound effect for starting when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

For example, in place of or in addition to the configuration in which the lighting control of each of the bet display portions 34a to 34c is individually performed like the bet display portion 34, the display control device 81 side bet support presentation is performed in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display portion 65. A configuration is also conceivable. In such a configuration, it is conceivable to set a display effect pattern until the betting process effect is completed when the betting number operation is performed, when the betting process effect is started. Then, even if the number of bets is manipulated in the middle of the betting process effect, rather than switching the display effect pattern to the display effect pattern of the bet corresponding effect in the middle, it is better to continue as it is, which leads to a reduction in the processing load. it is conceivable that. Therefore, by restricting at least the betting sound effect production side in the middle, while avoiding an increase in the processing load, inconvenience due to duplication of sound effects when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate is eliminated. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

FIG. 76 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process. In this modification, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the betting sound effect in the betting process effect continues, but the continuation of the lighting effect is restricted.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the processes of steps S3813, S3819, S3832, S3836 and S3839 are added as compared with the process of FIG. 68 is similar to the corresponding process.

That is, in the state of waiting until the second bet display portion 34b is turned on, it is determined in step S3834 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step S3835. If it is determined that there is, in step S3836, after executing the process of setting the limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a, the process proceeds to the process of switching to the bet correspondence effect in step S3829.

Also, in the state of waiting until the third bet display portion 34c is turned on, it is determined in step S3837 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step S3838. If it is determined that there is, in step S3839, the process of setting a limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process proceeds to the process of switching to the bet corresponding effect in step S3831.

In the process of switching to the bet corresponding effect, after executing the process of turning on the bet display portions 34a to 34c corresponding to the number of bets, it is determined in step S3832 whether or not the limit flag is set, and is set. If not, the specific regame bet effect setting process is terminated. When the limit flag is set, after switching to the bet correspondence effect, the process returns to step S3812.

When the bet timer becomes 0 in step S3812, an affirmative determination is made in step S3812, and it is determined whether or not the limit flag is set in step S3813. If it is not set, the second bet display section 34b is turned on in step S3814, and after performing the process of outputting a betting sound effect in step S3815, the third bet display section 34c is turned on in step S3816. Proceed to processing for turning on. If the limit flag is set in step S3813, the process of outputting the effect sound at the time of betting is executed without executing the process of turning on the second bet display section 34b, and then the third bet is executed. The process proceeds to the process of turning on the display section 34c.

Then, when the bet timer becomes 0 in step S3818, an affirmative determination is made in step S3818, and it is determined whether or not the above limit flag is set in step S3819. If it is not set, the third bet display section 34c is turned on in step S3820, and after executing the process of outputting a bet sound effect in step S3821, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. . When the limit flag is set in step S3819, the process of outputting the effect sound at the time of betting is executed without executing the process of turning on the third bet display section 34c, and then the specific re-game is executed. The bet effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 74(c) shows a state in which the sound effect at the time of betting in the above-described betting process presentation continues, but the continuation of the lighting presentation is restricted.

Similarly to tb1 to tb6, it is assumed that a bet is made in the regame setting process associated with winning a specific regame result in tb21 to tb25, and after the wait period has elapsed, the bet operation is performed in tb26. . In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb26. When the start operation is performed at time tb27, which is before time tb28 when the betting process effect is completed, the betting sound effect is continuously output, but the lighting effect of the bet display portions 34a to 34c is interrupted. Then, at time tb27, the bet display portions 34a to 34c corresponding to bets are turned on. As a result, in the betting process presentation started at tb26, sound effects at the time of betting are output until tb28. It seems to be switching. In this way, even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate, the bet number of the game in which the reels have started to rotate cannot be grasped from the bet display unit 34. It is possible to

FIG. 77 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process. In this modification, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, execution of the betting process effect is restricted. However, the bet response presentation is started at the timing scheduled when the betting process presentation is started.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the processes of steps S3913, S3919, S3935 and S3938 are added compared to the process of FIG. 68, and the other processes correspond to those of FIG. This is the same as the process for

That is, in the state of waiting until the second bet display portion 34b is turned on, it is determined in step S3933 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step S3934. If it is determined that the bet timer is set to 0, in step S3935, a process of setting a limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process returns to step S3912 and waits until the bet timer reaches zero. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, and it is determined in step S3913 whether or not the above limit flag is set. If not set, in step S3914, the second bet display section 34b is turned on, and in step S3915, a process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed. 2 is determined. On the other hand, if the restriction flag is set in step S3913, the process proceeds to step S3916 without performing the processes of steps S3914 and S3915.

If the number of previous bets is 3 instead of 2 in step S3916, processing for waiting until the third bet display portion 34c is turned on is performed in step S3917.

Also, in the state of waiting until the third bet display portion 34c is turned on, it is determined in step S3936 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step S3937. If it is determined that the bet timer is set to 0, in step S3938, a process of setting a limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process returns to step S3918 and waits until the bet timer reaches zero. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S3918, and it is determined in step S3919 whether or not the above limit flag is set. If it is not set, in step S3920, the third bet display section 34c is turned on, and in step S3921, a process of outputting a bet effect sound is executed, and then a specific regame bet effect setting process is executed. finish.

If affirmative determination is made in the process of determining whether or not the previous number of bets was 2 in step S3916, or if the limit flag is set in step S3919, the process proceeds to step S3929 to switch to the bet corresponding effect. Execute.

FIG. 74(d) shows a state in which the execution of the betting process effect is restricted, but the bet corresponding effect is started at the timing scheduled when the betting process effect is started.

Similarly to tb1 to tb6, it is assumed that a bet is made in the regame setting process associated with winning a specific regame result in tb31 to tb35, and after the wait period has passed, the bet operation is performed in tb36. . In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb36. For example, when the betting process effect is started, it is assumed that the betting process effect is set to be completed at tb38, and the bet corresponding effect is set to be started at tb38. Then, when the start operation is performed at tb37, which is before tb38, the output of the lighting effect and the betting sound effect is interrupted. However, at tb37, the lighting effect is maintained in the state of tb37 without switching to the bet corresponding effect. Then, at tb38, the effect is switched to bet correspondence. Specifically, for example, when the first bet display portion 34a is in a lighting state at tb37, but the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c are in a non-lit state, tb37 to tb38 are the first bet display portions. The state in which only the display portion 34a is lit is maintained, and at tb38, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are switched to the lit state. By doing so, when restricting the betting process effect in the middle, there is no need to change the scheduled execution (start) timing up to the betting corresponding effect, and the process can be simplified. .

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the relationship between the pressing order notification effect, the specific combination notification effect, and the betting process effect set in the effect setting process at the start of the modified example when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect is described. , with reference to FIGS. As already explained, in the start effect setting process, when the start operation is performed, the pressing order notification effect is executed before the wait period elapses, whereas the special combination notification effect is executed after the wait period elapses. and is executed when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate.

FIG. 78(a) shows the betting process rendering of the above embodiment.

When the start operation is performed at tc1, a lottery process is performed and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. When the result of the lottery process is the specific re-game result, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at tc2 and the specific re-game result winning is established, the bet is set by the re-game setting process. will be When the wait period after the start of rotation at tc1 elapses at tc6, the bet process presentation is started when the number of bets is operated at tc3 before the elapse of the wait period. Then, when the start operation is performed at tc4, which is before the wait period has passed and the betting process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc4 is displayed as the pressing order notification effect. If the result is neither a winning result nor a special combination result, the betting process effect is not interrupted at tc4 and continues as it is. Then, at tc5, the betting process presentation ends, and the presentation is switched to the betting corresponding presentation. After that, at tc6 when the wait period elapses, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate.

FIG. 79 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process, and in this modification, presence/absence of restriction on the betting process effect is changed in relation to the pressing order notification effect.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the process of step S4022 is added as compared with the process of FIG. 68, and other processes are the same as the corresponding processes of FIG.

That is, when the start operation command is received in step S4020, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S4021. is a winning push order and a push order notification command has been received, and it is determined whether or not this corresponds to execution of any of the push order notification effects (see steps S2101 to S2107). If none of the pressing order notification effects are to be executed, it is determined whether or not it is in the wait period in step S4023, and if it is in the wait period, processing to set a pseudo bet permission flag in step S4031. is executed, the process proceeds to the process of executing the betting process effect in step S4006. If it is not during the wait period in step S4023, the process proceeds to step S4024 to execute the bet correspondence effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4022 that any of the pressing order notification effects is to be executed, the bet support effect in step S4024 is executed without determining whether or not it is during the wait period in step S4023. Proceed to processing.

FIG. 78(b) shows a case where the pressing order notification effect is performed in the modification.

Similarly to tc1 to tc3, bets are made in the replay setting process associated with winning of a specific regame result at tc11 to tc13, and bet operation is performed at tc13 before the wait period elapses. A betting process presentation is started. Similarly, if the start operation is performed at tc14, which is before the wait period has elapsed and the betting process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc14 is the result of the pressing order notification effect. If so, the pressing order notification effect is started from tc14. In this case, in this modification, even before the wait period has elapsed, the betting process effect scheduled to be executed until tc15 is restricted at tc14. By doing so, the betting process effect does not overlap with the pressing order notification effect, and inconvenience due to duplication of effects and processes can be prevented. In addition, in the figure, when the betting process effect is interrupted at tc14, the effect is switched to bet corresponding effect at tc14. The rotation start processing of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R based on the start operation at tc14 is performed at tc16 after the wait period has elapsed.

FIG. 78(c) shows a case where the special combination notification effect is performed in the modified example.

Similarly to tc1 to tc3, bets are made in the replay setting process associated with winning of a specific regame result at tc21 to tc23, and bet operation is performed at tc23 before the wait period elapses. A betting process presentation is started. Similarly, when the start operation is performed at tc24, which is before the wait period elapses and the betting process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc24 is the result of performing the special combination notification effect. In this case, the special combination notification effect is performed not at tc24, but at tc26 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating after the wait period has passed. In this case, in this modified example, the betting process effect that was scheduled to be executed until tc25 is continued until tc25 without being restricted at tc24. In this way, even if the effect associated with the start operation, such as the specific win notification effect, does not overlap with the betting process effect, the betting process effect is not restricted, so that the non-execution period of the effect can be reduced unnecessarily. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

FIG. 80 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process. In this modification, the pressing order notification effect is restricted in relation to the pressing order notification effect and the betting process effect.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the processes of steps S4122 and S4123 are added compared to the process of FIG. 68, and other processes are the same as the corresponding processes of FIG. .

That is, when the start operation command is received in step S4120, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off in step S4121, and then in step S4122, based on the received start operation command, the effect at the start of this time is displayed. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the case of executing the pressing order notification effect for the third re-game (see steps S2101 to S2107). Even if none of the pressing order notification performances are executed or the pressing order reporting performance is executed, the pressing order reporting performances for the first to sixth small winnings and the pressing order reporting for the second replay. If it is an effect, it is determined in step S4124 whether or not it is in the wait period, and if it is in the wait period, in step S4132, after executing the processing of setting the pseudo bet permission flag, The process proceeds to step S4106 for executing the betting process effect. If it is not during the wait period in step S4124, the process proceeds to step S4125 to execute the bet correspondence effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4122 that the third replay pressing order notification effect is to be executed, then in step S4123 a process of setting a pressing order delay flag in the flag storage area 183a is executed. , the process advances to step S4123 to determine whether or not it is in the wait period.

In step S2104, step S2106, and step S2107 of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 52), the pressing order delay flag is set in step S4201 as shown in the flowchart of FIG. determine whether or not there is When the push order delay flag is not set, in step S4202, the corresponding push order notification effect is executed. On the other hand, if the push order delay flag is set, it is determined whether or not the betting process effect has ended in step S4203. When the betting process effect ends, the push order delay flag is cleared in step S4204, and then the push order notification effect is executed in step S4202.

FIG. 78(d) shows how the pressing order notification effect side is restricted.

Similarly to tc1 to tc3, bets are made in the replay setting process associated with winning of a specific regame result at tc31 to tc33, and a bet operation is performed at tc33 before the wait period elapses. A betting process presentation is started. Similarly, when the start operation is performed at tc34 during execution of the betting process effect before the wait period elapses, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc34 is the push order for the third regame. In the case where the notification effect is to be performed, in this modified example, the execution of the press order notification effect is restricted. That is, when the execution of the betting process effect and the predetermined pressing order notification effect overlap before the wait period elapses, the execution of the pressing order notification effect is restricted, and the betting process effect started from tc34 ends. From tc35, the pressing order notification effect is started. Note that tc35 is also before the wait period elapses. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate duplication between the betting process presentation and the predetermined pressing order notification presentation while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable that the betting process presentation is switched to the betting correspondence presentation in the middle. . In the figure, the rotation start processing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the start operation at tc34 is performed at tc36 after the wait period has passed.

On the other hand, when the pressing order notification effect based on the start operation at tc34 is not the pressing order notification effect for the third replay, the pressing order notification effect is executed as it is at tc13. The betting process production side is restricted.

Here, the pressing order notification effect is to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. Then, the winning combination is set so that the winning result differs depending on the order of operation. Therefore, in order to encourage more careful operation, it is set to start the pressing order notification effect based on the start operation even before the wait period has elapsed. In particular, when winning by pressing the bell, the winning result differs depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the result. Therefore, in the pressing order notification effect at the time of winning the pressing order bell, by restricting the betting process effect side, it is possible to preferably secure the player's profit.

On the other hand, with regard to the normal replays A to C, although the winning re-game result differs depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44, the player's profit does not change regardless of which re-game result wins. Therefore, when the pressing order notification effect and the betting process effect at the time of winning the normal reply A to C overlap, the pressing order notification effect side is limited, so that the player does not suffer a disadvantage. It is possible to eliminate the duplication of both productions.

In addition, when the pressing order notification effect for the second replay overlaps with the betting process effect among the pressing order notification effect at the time of winning the normal reply A to C, the betting process effect side is restricted, while the third When the pressing order notification effect for replaying overlaps with the betting process effect, the pressing order notification effect is restricted. The second re-game push order notification effect is executed at the start of the first AT mode, and the third re-game push order notification effect is executed at the start of the second AT mode. By restricting the notification effect, the player can perceive the start of the second AT mode before notification of the pressing order for the third re-game. By doing so, it is possible to create novel game characteristics such as knowing in advance the type of AT mode through restriction of the pressing order notification effect due to overlap with the betting process effect.

Although not shown in the drawings, even when the pressing order notification effect side is limited, the pressing order notification on the main controller 101 side is started at the operation timing of the start lever 41 . By doing so, it is possible to meet the needs of a player who wants to perceive the order of operations more quickly.

It should be noted that when the pressing order notification effect for the third re-game overlaps with the betting process effect, the pressing order notification effect side is always restricted, but the pressing order notification effect is determined with a predetermined probability through a lottery or the like. may be configured to limit the In addition, when the pressing order notification effect and the betting process effect for the second re-game overlap, the betting process effect is always restricted, but the pressing order reporting effect is selected at a predetermined probability through a lottery or the like. It is good also as a structure which restrict|limits. In these cases, any AT mode is started through the fact that the rate of limiting the second re-game pushing order notification effect side and the rate of limiting the pressing order reporting effect side for the third re-game are different. It is possible to predict whether or not, and by making the rate of limiting the pressing order notification effect side for the third re-game where the advantageous AT mode is started higher, the relationship with the betting process effect It is possible to create a new game property such as making the user desire that the pressing order notification effect side is restricted. Also, the above ratio may be determined by the selection rate determined by the AT type determination process, and by limiting the pressing order notification effect to the AT mode, which is easier to select, the betting process effect can be improved. The restricted scenes are reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity due to the restriction of the betting process presentation.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, FIG. 82 shows a modified example of the relationship between the reel effects using the operation modes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the betting process effects when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect. 84 will be described. The reel effect is executed in the freeze lottery process in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and is an effect executed in the rotation effect process (step S401) in the reel control process (FIG. 22). Here, as a reel effect, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the "red 7" pattern is displayed. A first freeze effect, such as aligning the reels in the middle row, and a second freeze effect, in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait for the start of rotation for a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec), will be described. That is, the first freeze effect is a reel effect using an operation mode that rotates the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the second freeze effect is a reel effect that uses an operation mode that does not rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. be.

FIG. 82 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process, and in the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modification, steps S4322, S4333 and S4336 are different from the process of FIG. is added, and other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in FIG.

That is, in step S4320, it is determined that the start operation command has been received, and in step S4321, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. Execution of lottery processing It is determined whether or not a first freeze command indicating that the result of the lottery corresponds to the execution of the first freeze performance has been received. If the first freeze command has not been received, in step S4323 the process proceeds to the process of determining whether or not it is in the wait period. On the other hand, if the first freeze command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4324 to perform a bet correspondence effect without determining whether or not it is in the wait period of step S4323.

Further, when a start operation command is received in the waiting state until the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c are turned on in the betting process rendering (when affirmative determination is made in step S4332 or step S4335). , in steps S4333 and S4336, it is determined whether or not the first freeze command has been received as the received start operation command. When the first freeze effect is executed, the processing for switching to the bet corresponding effect is performed as it is without performing the determination processing (steps S4334 and S4337) as to whether it is during the wait period. On the other hand, if the first freeze command has not been received, the process proceeds to the process of determining whether or not it is during the wait period.

In FIG. 83(a), the betting operation is performed at td1, the betting process effect is performed until td2, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation performed at td3, This shows the case where the result of the lottery process based on the start operation is the specific replay result. At td4, a win as a result of a specific re-game is established, the re-game state is set, and after the wait period has passed at td5, the number of bets is operated at td6, and the betting process presentation in the pseudo-bet presentation is started. be. Then, it is assumed that a start operation is performed at td7, which is before td8 when the betting process effect is completed, and that the first freeze effect is performed in the lottery process based on the start operation.

In this case, although the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate from td7, the rotation based on the rotation start processing (step S402) in the reel control processing (FIG. 22) starts from td9 when the first freeze effect ends. be started. That is, normally, based on the start operation, the start drive control is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and reach a constant speed rotation, and then the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated. Assuming the above configuration, when performing the reel effect, specific drive control for the reel effect is performed prior to the start drive control. From td7 to td9, the first specific drive control is performed as the specific drive control for the first freeze effect involving the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the start drive control is performed from td9.

Then, the betting process presentation started from td6 does not overlap with the start driving control based on the start operation at td7. However, in this case, the first specific drive control in the first freeze effect is performed from td7, and since the first specific drive control and the betting process effect overlap, the betting process effect is interrupted at td7. and By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to duplication of the driving control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the betting process presentation. In the figure, when the betting process effect is interrupted at td7, the effect is switched to bet corresponding effect at td7.

FIG. 83(b) shows the case of the second freeze effect.

td11 to td16 are the same as td1 to td6, and based on the bet number operation of td16, the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is started. It is assumed that a start operation is performed at td17, which is before td18 when the betting process effect is completed, and that the second freeze effect is performed in the lottery process based on the start operation.

As described above, when the reel effect at the start of rotation is performed, the specific drive control for the reel effect is performed before the start drive control, but td17 to td19 are the specific drive control for the second freeze effect. The second specific drive control is performed, and the start drive control is performed from td19. Therefore, in this modified example, the betting process effect started at td16 is not interrupted at td17, but is executed until td18 to switch to the bet corresponding effect. That is, from td17 to td18, the betting process effect overlaps with the second specific drive control for the second freeze effect. Since the second specific drive control is a drive control that does not involve the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, it is unlikely that the processing load will increase significantly even if it overlaps in this way. . Moreover, since the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have not actually started to rotate, the betting process presentation is interrupted in the middle even though the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have not started to rotate. It is also possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A modification of the freeze effect lottery will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing a modification of the freeze lottery process in the lottery process (FIG. 19).

In step S4401, a freeze execution lottery is performed. In the freeze lottery, for example, if the lottery result of this game is a result (specific role) that is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, the result that is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery (for example, normal replies A to C ), it is set to make it easier to win the freeze lottery. Also, the winning probability may differ depending on the type of freeze effect to be executed. Then, in step S4402, it is determined whether or not the result of the freeze execution lottery corresponds to the execution of the first freeze effect. When executing the first freeze effect, the first freeze flag is set in step S4403, and the first freeze command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4404. Then, freeze lottery End the process. When the first freeze flag is set, the rotation effect processing of the reel control processing is controlled to perform the first freeze effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S4402, it is determined in step S4405 whether or not the result of the freeze execution lottery corresponds to the execution of the second freeze effect. When executing the second freeze effect, the second freeze flag is set in step S4406, and the second freeze command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4407. Then, freeze lottery End the process. When the second freeze flag is set, the rotation effect processing of the reel control processing is controlled to perform the second freeze effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S4405, the specific replay flag is set in step S4408, and the current start operation is within a predetermined period (within 0.4 sec) after any bet number operation is performed. It is determined whether or not it was the operation of If the determination in step S4408 is affirmative, the process advances to step S4406 to perform processing for executing the second freeze effect. That is, when the specific re-gaming flag is set and the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the second freeze even if the result of the freeze execution lottery does not correspond to the execution of the second freeze effect A performance is performed.

FIG. 83(c) shows a case where the result of the freeze lottery is the result corresponding to the execution of the second freeze effect, and td21 to td26 are the same as the above td1 to td6, and the bet number operation of td26 , the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is started. When the start operation is performed at td28 after td27 when the betting process effect is completed and the second freeze effect is won, the second specific drive control of the second freeze effect is performed from td28 to td29, and then , the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate (start drive control is performed).

FIG. 83(d) is the case where the result of the freeze lottery is not the result corresponding to the execution of the second freeze effect, and at td37 before td38 when the betting process effect started at td36 is completed This indicates that a start operation was performed with Note that td31 to td36 are the same as the above td1 to td6. In this case, in this modification, even if the second freeze effect is not won, the second freeze effect is executed, and the betting process effect is not interrupted in the middle and is executed until td38. make it In this way, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the second freeze effect is deliberately executed, thereby reducing the event that the betting process effect is interrupted in the middle. It is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity due to being interrupted in the middle. The second freeze effect started at td37 is executed until td39, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating from td39 (start drive control is performed).

<Modification 4>
In this modification, in the replay state set based on the winning of a specific replay result, the mode of the pseudo-bet effect is changed according to the type of bet operation performed.

FIG. 85(a) shows a pseudo-bet effect according to the type of bet operation in the above embodiment.

In a game in which the specific number of coins is set to three, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at te1, the first bet display portion 34a, the second bet display portion 34b, and the third bet display portion 34c are displayed in sequence. A bet process effect in the lit normal bet effect is executed, and at te2, the effect is switched to a bet corresponding effect. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b switches from the ON state to the OFF state at te1. When a start operation is performed at te3 and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started, and the result of the lottery process based on the start operation is a specific replay result, each reel 32L at te4. , 32M and 32R are stopped and a specific re-game result win is established, a bet corresponding to the specific number of 3 is made in the re-game setting process.

At te5 in this replay state, when a betting operation is performed in which medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56, a specific insertion command is output from the main controller 101 as described above. A pseudo-bet effect is executed based on the specific input command. That is, a bet process effect is executed in which the first bet display portion 34a, the second bet display portion 34b, and the third bet display portion 34c are sequentially lit, and at te6, the bet corresponding effect is performed. At te5, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In other words, in the above-described embodiment, in the replay state based on the winning of a specific replay result, not only when the bet operation is performed by the first credit insertion switch 56, but also when one medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45. Even when the bet number operation is performed, the betting process presentation corresponding to the same number of bets as the number of bets in the lottery resulting in the specific replay result is executed.

Note that te5 shows the case where the bet number operation is performed as medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45, but similarly, the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated as the bet number operation corresponding to one bet. Even so, in the pseudo-bet effect based on the output of the specific second operation command, the bet is made so that the bet effect corresponding to 3 bets, which is the same number of bets as the number of bets in the lottery that resulted in the specific replay result. A process performance is performed.

By the way, even if medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 after the betting process effect is performed, the betting process effect is not executed, and the betting sound effect is not output, and only the credit counter is incremented. It is done, and the output of the credit increase sound effect is done. On the other hand, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated after the betting process effect is performed, no betting effect sound is output and the credit counter is not incremented.

FIG. 86 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process, and in the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modification, steps S4505 and S4506 are performed in comparison with the process of FIG. Added.

That is, if it is determined in step S4504 that any one of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command has been received, the process advances to step S4505. In step S4505, it is determined whether the received command is a specific input command or a specific second operation command. If it is a specific first command, the process advances to step S4507 to execute processing for performing a betting process effect. On the other hand, if it is the specific throwing command or the specific second operation command, in step S4506, the single bet effect setting process is executed, and then the specific regame bet effect setting process is terminated. Note that the single bet effect setting process in step S4506 is as shown in FIG. However, in the single bet effect setting process in this case, the process of setting the extinguished flag in step S3002 is not performed.

In FIG. 85(b), in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, a bet number operation corresponding to one bet operation such as inserting a medal from the second credit insertion switch 57 or the medal insertion slot 45 is performed. shows the case.

Similarly to te1 to te4, in the situation where the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result is set at te11 to te14, when one medal is inserted from the medal slot 45 at te15, the betting effect After a betting process effect in which the first bet display section 34a is turned on along with sound, a bet corresponding effect showing a state in which one bet is placed at te16 is performed. In addition, when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated at te17, a bet process presentation is performed in which the second bet display portion 34b is turned on along with a betting sound effect, and two bets are placed at te18. It will be a bet corresponding production that shows the state. Then, when one medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 at te19, a betting process effect is performed in which the third bet display section 34c is turned on with a betting sound effect, and three bets are betted at te20. It will be a bet corresponding production that shows the state that has been performed. In this case, the lighting state of the first credit lamp 56b is maintained until te19. That is, in the pseudo-bet effect, an effect equivalent to the single-bet effect is performed, and by doing so, the pseudo-bet effect can be made to have the same mode as the effect at the time of the actual bet (single-bet effect). This can help give the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other minor combination results and losing results.

FIG. 85(c) shows a case where a start operation is performed in the middle of the configuration in which the single bet effect is performed in the pseudo bet effect as shown in FIG. 85(b).

At te21 to te28, similarly to te11 to te18, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific regame result, a pseudo bet effect corresponding to one bet is executed at te25 to te28, and the first bet display section 34a and The second bet display portion 34b is in a lighting state, and a bet ready state corresponding to two bets being made is established. In this situation, when the start operation is performed at te29 and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, the execution of the betting process effect is restricted at te29, and the third bet display portion 34c is lit. However, no bet sound effect is output. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate in a state where a bet-corresponding effect corresponding to three bets is being performed. Also, in this case, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state at te29 where the start operation is performed.

FIG. 85(d) shows a bet corresponding effect corresponding to a single bet operation such as inserting a medal from the second credit inserting switch 57 or the medal inserting slot 45, even in the pseudo bet effect. It shows a limiting example. In addition, although a detailed description of the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this case will be omitted, in the above FIG. After turning off the first credit lamp 56b, outputting the betting sound effect in step S3005 of the single bet effect setting process (FIG. 69), and then ending the specific replay bet effect setting process. make sure to

te31 to te34 are the same as te1 to te4, and are set to a replay state based on winning a specific replay result. When one medal is inserted from the medal slot 45 at te35, the execution of the betting process effect is restricted and switched to the bet corresponding effect. At te35, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In this case, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated at te36 or medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 at te37, the betting process effect is not executed. However, sound effects are output at the time of betting in association with betting operations for each of te35, te36, and te37. In other words, the execution mode is limited so that only the sound effect at the time of betting in the betting process presentation is executed in each of the betting operations of te35, te36, and te37. In this way, by outputting the effect sound at the time of betting, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration, and the player can clearly understand that each betting operation has been accepted. . In this case as well, even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 45 at te38 after outputting the betting sound effect for three medals, the betting process production is not executed, and the betting sound effect is output. It is preferable that only incrementing of the credit counter is performed without Also in this case, the credit increase sound effect may be output when the credit counter is incremented.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the provisional standby state and the standby state are set even in the replay state. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing standby state setting processing in this modification.

The standby state setting process in this modified example differs from the process of FIG. 71 in that counting of the standby counter is permitted even in the replay state, and the other processes are the corresponding processes in FIG. It is the same.

That is, if it is determined in step S4601 that no game operation has been performed, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the reels are rotating, and in step S4603 it is determined whether or not medals are being paid out. do. If the reels are not rotating and the medals are not being paid out, a process of permitting the waiting counter to count is executed in step S4603. If the reels are spinning or medals are being paid out, a process of disabling the count of the standby counter is executed in step S4605.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing standby processing in this modified example. In the standby processing in this modification, steps S4702, S4704, S4714, S4716, and steps S4719 to S4722 are added as compared with the processing in FIG. is similar to the corresponding process in

That is, when the game ends in step S4713, it is determined in step S4714 whether or not a specific replay result win has been established. If the game result is other than the specific re-game result win, a process of starting measurement of the display continuation counter is executed in step S4715. In the case of a specific re-game result win, after executing the process of setting the specific re-game state flag in the various flag storage area 183a in step S4716, the process proceeds to the measurement start process of the display continuation counter in step S4715.

Further, when the display continuation counter reaches 30 seconds corresponding to the first transition period without performing any game operation in step S4717 (step S4718: YES), in step S4719, the specific re-gaming state flag is Determine whether it is set. If it is not set, the processing for temporary standby state in steps S4720 and S4721 is executed. The processes of steps S4720 and S4721 are the same as the processes of steps S3616 and S3617, and are processes for turning off the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b.

On the other hand, if the first transition period has passed after winning the specific regame result (step S4719: YES), a process of turning off the bet display section 34 is executed in step S4722, and the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step S4723. blinks, and then the standby process is terminated. In other words, the provisional standby state after winning a specific re-game result differs from the provisional standby state after other results in the reporting mode of the first credit lamp 56b.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S4701 that the second transition period to the standby state has elapsed, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not the specific replay state flag has been set. If it is not set, in steps S4703 to S4707, a process of setting the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b to the standby mode is executed. The processing of steps S4703 to S4707 is the same as the processing of steps S3602 to S3605.

On the other hand, if the second transition period has passed after the specific re-game result win (step S4702: YES), the auxiliary display unit 65 is displayed in step S4704 to notify that the specific re-game win has been established. Control is performed so as to display characters such as "A great chance is occurring!". After that, in steps S4705 to S4707, processing is executed to put the speaker 64, the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b into the standby mode.

FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing the temporary standby state and the standby state in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 89(a1), when the game started at tf1 is won as a normal replay result, and when the normal replay result wins at tf2, the first transition period (TA) elapses from tf2. When it reaches tf3, it is set to the temporary standby state. In this case, the bet display section 34 is turned off. By the way, the first credit lamp 56b remains in the off state because it has already been won as a result of the normal replay. After that, at tf4 when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf2, the standby state is set. In this case, the BET display section 75 is turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode (FIG. 89(a2)).

As shown in FIG. 89(b1), if the game started at tf11 is won as a result of a minor combination and ends at tf12, the first transition period (TA) elapses from tf12 to tf13. , is set to the temporary standby state. In this case, the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are turned off. After that, at tf14 when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf12, the standby state is set. In this case, the BET display section 75 is turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode (FIG. 89(b2)).

As shown in FIG. 89(c1), when the game started at tf21 is a specific replay result win, and the specific replay result win is established at tf22, the first transition period (TA) elapses from tf22. When tf23 is reached, the temporary standby state is set. In this case, the bet display section 34 is turned off, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on and off. After that, at tf24 when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf22, the standby state is set. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b and the BET display section 75 are turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode. However, the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 is different from those in FIGS. 89(a2) and 89(b2) (FIG. 89(c2)).

As described above, the first credit lamps 56b are all turned on after the game in which the specific replay result was won or the game resulted in a small winning combination is ended. However, in this modified example, when the first transition period has elapsed and the temporary standby state is entered, the light is turned off after the result of a small winning combination, but is flashed after the specific replay result is won. Therefore, before transitioning to the temporary standby state, it is not possible to distinguish between the specific re-game result and the minor combination result from the notification mode of the first credit lamp 56b, but after transitioning to the temporary standby state, it is possible to distinguish. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, regardless of the result, the bet display section 34 is turned off in the temporary standby state. Here, the bet display section 34 is provided on the game panel 25 facing forward of the slot machine 10 . On the other hand, the first credit lamp 56b is located below the game panel 25 and is built in the first credit insertion switch 56 projecting upward from the operation surface intersecting the game panel 25 (see FIG. 1). , see FIG. 2). In this case, when the slot machine 10 is viewed from a place away from the slot machine 10, such as from the edge of an island on which a plurality of game tables are arranged, it is possible to confirm whether or not the bet display section 34 is lit. However, the presence or absence of lighting of the first credit lamp 56b cannot be confirmed or is more difficult to confirm than the bet display section 34.例文帳に追加Therefore, in order to confirm whether or not the first credit lamp 56b is lit (blinking) as described above, it may be necessary to come near the slot machine 10 to confirm. Thus, by making it difficult to check the state of the slot machine 10 at a glance, even if it is not in the desired state, it is possible to motivate the player to try playing a game because the player has come so close. It is possible to improve the operating rate of the slot machine 10.

Further, when shifting to the standby state, the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display section 34 are turned off after any result, but the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 is different only after winning a specific re-game result. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 10 from being left unattended in a situation where there is a high possibility that the specific replay result win has been established and that the player has won a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like. becomes possible.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, notification when the credit is settled by operating the settlement switch 59 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing medal return processing in this modified example. The medal return process is a process executed at step S206 in the normal process (FIG. 18).

At step S4801, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S4802. In step S4802, it is determined whether or not the specific re-game flag has been set in the immediately preceding BET processing, and the re-game state is based on the specific re-game result win. If the specific replay flag is not set, a process of setting a settlement command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4803.

In the subsequent step S4804, it is determined whether or not any of the replay flags are set. If none of the replay flags are set and the replay state is not set, then in step S4805 the BET counter and the credit counter are displayed. The hopper device 51 is controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the total number of . After that, in step S4806, processing for clearing the BET counter and the credit counter to 0 is executed, and then this medal return processing ends.

If any replay flag is set in step S4804 and the game is in replay state, in step S4807 the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter is paid out. After that, in step S4808, after executing a process of clearing the credit counter to 0, the medal return process is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, it is possible to settle credits even in the replay state. Medals are paid out except for the virtual medals that have been bet. Therefore, in the replay state, credits can be settled by operating the settlement switch 59, but even after the settlement, at least one game can be played without requiring new medals. be done. Such a configuration solves the problem that the game cannot be ended in succession when the game is closed, such as when the game hall is closed. By doing so, it is possible to end the game even if the right to play one game is abandoned, and the player's diversified Needs can be met.

However, of the replay states, in the replay state based on winning a specific replay result, there is a high possibility of not only being able to play one game, but also AT mode winning, etc. based on winning a specific role as described above. , there is a high possibility that the game will be terminated as it is, leading to a large loss for the player. Therefore, when it is determined in step S4802 that the specific re-game flag is set, in step S4809, it is determined whether or not the third transition period has elapsed since the specific re-game flag was set, for example, a specific re-game flag. A timer counter or the like that starts counting after setting a replay flag is used for determination. In this modification, 20 sec is set as the third transition period, and the 20 sec is shorter than the second transition period set to the standby state and shorter than the first transition period set to the temporary standby state. have set. If the third transition period has not passed, the medal return processing is terminated as it is.

That is, in this modification, the credits cannot be settled even if the settlement switch 59 is operated until the third transition period elapses after entering the re-game state based on the winning of the specific re-game result.

If the third transition period has passed in step S4809, the process of adding 1 to the settlement operation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S4810, and the settlement operation counter reaches a specific number in step S4811. 2 is determined. If it has not reached 2, that is, if it is the first settlement operation even after the third transition period has elapsed, the medal return processing is terminated as it is.

In other words, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific regame result, credit settlement may be restricted even if the settlement switch 59 is operated. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the abandonment of the AT mode winning or the like based on the specific replay result winning.

When the settlement operation counter reaches the specific number in step S4811, after clearing the settlement operation counter in step S4812, a process of setting a specific settlement command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4813. . After that, in steps S4804 to S4808, credit settlement processing is performed. In other words, in the replay state based on the winning of a specific replay result, credits can be settled by performing a specific number of settlement operations.

The effect processing at the time of return on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect processing at the time of return is processing executed as one processing of other processing (step S2011) in the effect setting processing (FIG. 51).

In step S4901, it is determined whether or not any one of the settlement command and the specific settlement command has been received. If any command has been received, the process advances to step S4902.

In step S4902, subtraction of the return period counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is started. The return period counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the duration of the sound effect at the time of payment (sound effect at the time of return), and the initial value is set to 5000. FIG. The return period counter is decremented by 1 every 2 sec, and becomes 0 after 10 sec.

In subsequent step S4903, it is determined whether or not a specific payment command has been received. If the payment command is not a specific payment command, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a return sound effect in step S4904. Then, in step S4905, it is determined whether or not the return period counter has become 0, and the process waits until it becomes 0. When the value becomes 0, in step S4906, the output of the sound effect at the time of return is stopped, and then the effect processing at the time of return is ended. As the return sound effect, for example, an announcement such as "Ping-pong payment has been made" is set to be repeated over a predetermined period. It is preferable that the sound effect at the time of return is played at a high volume (maximum volume). It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to distinguish them.

If a specific settlement command is received in step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4907. The processing of step S49047 and step S4921 is the same as the processing of steps S3405 to S3419 in the specific re-game bet effect setting process (FIG. 68). That is, by the processing of steps S4907 to S4921, the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is executed.

Then, in step S4921, the betting process effect is completed, and after switching to the bet corresponding effect in the replay state based on the winning of the specific regame result, in step S4904, the effect sound at the time of return is output. After the process is executed, the return effect process is terminated.

The manner in which credit settlement is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 92(a) shows how the settlement is made after the result of the small winning combination.

That is, after the betting operation is performed at tg1 and the betting process effect is completed at tg2, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at tg3 and stop at tg4, and the lottery process at tg2. result is a small winning combination. In this case, when the settlement switch 59 is operated at tg5, medals are paid out until tg6. Here, since the credit counter becomes 0 due to settlement as described above, the first credit lamp 56 is also turned off at tg5. In addition, the predetermined period during which the return sound effect is executed is set as a period longer than the total number (53) of the maximum number of credit counters and the maximum number of bet counters is paid out, The returning sound effect continues until tg7, which is later than tg6 when the return of the medals is completed. Incidentally, in this modified example, the length of the return sound effect is set as a uniform predetermined period (TC, 10 sec) regardless of the number of medals returned. It is possible to plan

FIG. 92(b) shows how settlement is carried out after winning a specific re-game result.

In other words, the game is completed at tg11 to tg14 in the same manner as at tg1 to tg4, and at tg14, the replay setting processing based on the winning of the specific replay result is performed. Even if the settlement switch 59 is operated at t15 after the third transition period has passed, the settlement operation counter is 1, so the settlement is not performed. At tg16, the settlement switch 59 is operated again, so that the settlement operation counter becomes 2 and settlement is started. However, at tg16, the return sound effect does not start to be output. Instead, from tg16 to tg17, a betting process effect is performed, and at tg17, the effect is switched to a bet correspondence effect. When the betting process presentation is completed at tg17, the output of the settlement sound effect is started from tg17, and the output of the settlement sound effect continues until tg19. The return of medals is completed at tg18.

Here, in this modified example, the length of the settlement sound effect when the specific settlement command is received is the length obtained by subtracting the length of the betting process presentation from the predetermined period. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience and discomfort of the payment sound effect based on the specific payment command from continuing for an unnecessarily long time after the completion of returning the medals.

After tg19 when the output of the effect sound at the time of settlement is completed, if the start operation is performed at tg20 without going through the betting operation, the bet is made in the replay state as described above. It is possible to start a game corresponding to

As described above, in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result win, the settlement may be restricted even if the settlement switch 59 is operated, so that the player does not notice the specific re-game win. It is possible to suitably suppress the game from being ended prematurely.

In addition, even in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, the settlement can be made by operating the settlement switch 59 for a specific number, and the needs of the player who wants to end the game even though he or she is aware of it are made possible. be able to respond.

However, it is conceivable that some players, in their haste to finish the game, try to make a payment by pressing the payment switch 59 repeatedly without noticing the winning of the specific re-game result. Therefore, as described above, even though settlement can be made by operating the settlement switch 59, in such a case, a pseudo-bet effect is performed. It can be expected that even the player who has made the payment without paying will notice, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

Moreover, the pseudo bet effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59 is set so as not to overlap with the effect sound at the time of settlement. As a result, it becomes easier to notice that the pseudo-bet effect is being performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult to give up the benefit of winning the specific re-game result.

The configuration for preventing the overlapping of the sound effect at the time of settlement and the pseudo-bet presentation as described above may be changed as follows.

FIG. 92(c) shows how, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, when the settlement is made, the effect sound at the time of settlement is output first, and the pseudo-bet effect is executed later. .

That is, in the same manner as tg11 to tg14, the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result is set in tg21 to tg24, and the settlement switch 59 is operated in tg25 and tg26, thereby credit settlement is performed. . In this case, the return of the medal is executed from tg26, and the return sound effect starts to be output from tg26. Then, when the return of medals is completed at tg27, the pseudo-bet effect is started from tg27. The pseudo bet effect is executed until tg29. In other words, the period from tg26 to tg28 is the output period of the return sound effect, and from tg27 to tg28, the betting process presentation side is given priority, and the output of the return sound effect is restricted.

In this case, when the settlement is started, the output of the return sound effect is started, but the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at tg27 when the pseudo-bet effect is started, so the settlement is started. In spite of this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the winning of the specific regame result through the lighting state of the first credit lamp 56b.

As described above, even if settlement is made in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, the game can be played without requiring a new bet because it is in the replay state. In FIG. 92(d), the timing at which the game is started after settlement is made is different from that in FIG. 92(b).

That is, tg31 to tg38 are the same as tg11 to tg18 above, and indicate that the return of medals started from tg36 is completed at tg38. In addition, a pseudo-bet effect is performed from tg36, and an effect sound at the time of return is output from tg37. Under such circumstances, if the start operation is performed at time tg39, which is before time tg40 when the return sound effect is scheduled to end, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at time tg39. . Therefore, in such a scene, it is preferable to end the return sound effect at tg39. By doing so, it is possible to avoid duplication of the presentation and processing at the time of rotation start and the effect sound at the time of return and processing therefor.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the aspect of the pseudo-bet effect is changed. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example.

In the specific replay betting effect setting process in this modified example, compared with the process of FIG. The difference is that effects are performed, and other processing is the same as the corresponding processing in FIG.

That is, in the present modification, in the process of setting the betting interval of the betting process effect based on the bet number operation (steps S5011 and S5016), the interval of approximately 0.1 sec, which is longer than the interval of the above embodiment (approximately 0.1 sec), is set. Set 2 sec. That is, the interval between bets in the betting process effect of the pseudo-bet effect in this modified example is the same as the interval between bets in the betting process effect of the replay betting effect that is normally executed based on the winning result of the replay. There is, and the betting process effect of the pseudo bet effect is in common with the betting process effect of the replay betting effect.

Further, in this modification, when it is determined that the start operation command has been received in step S5020, the first credit lamp 56b and all bet display units 34a to 34c are extinguished (steps S5021 and S5023). After executing the process of turning on the first bet display section 34a in step S5025, in the present modification, the process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed in step S5026.

Then, in step S5027, it is determined whether or not the previous bet number was 1, and if not 1, the process proceeds to step S5028, and 67 corresponding to about 0.1 sec is input to the bet timer. , waits until the bet timer reaches 0 in step S5029. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S5029, a process for turning on the second bet display section 34b is executed in step S5030, and a bet sound effect is output in step S5031. Execute the process.

In the following step S5032, it is determined whether or not the previous bet number was 2, and if not 2, the process proceeds to step S5033, and 67 corresponding to about 0.1 sec is input to the bet timer, In step S5034, it waits until the bet timer reaches 0. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S5034, a process for turning on the third bet display section 34c is executed in step S5035, and a bet sound effect is output in step S5036. After executing the process, the specific regame bet effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S5027 or step S5032, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated.

That is, in this modification, when any bet number operation is performed in the re-gaming state based on the winning of the specific re-game result, a betting process effect in which the notification mode is the same as the betting process effect in the re-game betting effect After executing , switch to bet support production. On the other hand, in the replay state, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, after executing the betting process effect that has the same notification mode as the betting process effect in the continuous bet effect, the effect is switched to the bet corresponding effect. . As described above, the betting process effect in the repeated bet effect is set to take a shorter period of time than the betting process effect in the regame betting effect. Therefore, by doing as described above, in the re-gaming state based on the win of the specific re-game result, when the start operation is performed without going through the bet operation, the pseudo-bet effect based on the bet operation is reduced. It is possible to end the betting process presentation early and switch to the betting-corresponding presentation, and reduce overlap between the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the betting process presentation.

Further, as already explained, in the specific re-game bet effect setting process, even if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, if the wait period has not elapsed (step S5022: YES), An effect similar to the pseudo-bet effect based on the bet operation is performed. In other words, in this modified example, when the start operation is performed without the operation of the number of bets, the notification mode of the betting process effect is different before and after the wait period has elapsed. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the bet effect well according to the progress of the game, such as whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating.

In this case, as in the above modified example, any of the notification modes can be switched to the bet response presentation via the betting process presentation, thereby making it possible to minimize the difference between the two notification modes, thereby improving the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity while matching the bet effect to the game.

Moreover, all of the notification modes are notification modes used for other betting effects, and the notification mode before the wait period has passed is common to the notification mode in the replay betting effect, and the notification mode after the wait period has passed. The mode is common to the notification mode in the continuous bet effect. By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated notification mode in order to change the notification mode of the bet effect according to the progress of the game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data.

In particular, since the two notification modes differ only in the intervals at which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned on, it is possible to change the notification modes of the bet effects simply by adjusting the intervals. Therefore, it is possible to match the bet effect with the progress of the game with an extremely simple configuration.

In addition, since it only adjusts the interval between bets, if the wait period has passed during the betting process effect, switching to the bet effect on the side where the wait period has passed will only cause a shift in the interval. While completing the betting process presentation early, it is possible to expect the effect of reducing the sense of incongruity given to the player.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a combination of some or all of them may be applied.

(1) The description has been made on the premise that the replay setting process is executed as one of the BET processes at the start of the game. It may be configured to perform processing. More specifically, in the payout determination process (step S413) in the reel control process (FIG. 22), the replay setting process may be executed when winning is established as a result of the replay. Further, the replay setting process may be executed in the medal payout process (step S214) in the normal process (FIG. 18).

(2) When a win is established as a result of a normal re-game, the BET display portions 75 are sequentially lit up, and when a win is established as a result of a specific re-game, the BET display portions 75 are simultaneously lit. Although it is configured to be in the state, such a configuration may be changed. In other words, even when a specific re-game result win is established, the BET display section 75 may be sequentially turned on. In this case, the intervals at which the BET display portions 75a to 75c are lit may be the same or substantially the same intervals for the normal re-game result and the specific re-game result, or may be different intervals. However, if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect based on the winning of the specific re-game result, in order not to cause a scene in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not start rotating, the specific The interval at which the BET display units 75a to 75c are turned on based on the winning result of the replay is preferably shorter than in the case of the normal replay result. The length may be the same as or substantially the same as the interval of lighting, or the interval may be shorter than the interval of lighting the BET display portions 75a to 75c in the first operation corresponding process.

(3) A re-game other than the first re-game is regarded as a specific re-game result, and when the specific re-game result wins, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, and a pseudo bet effect is produced based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56 or the like. However, the first credit lamp 56b may similarly be turned on or a pseudo-bet effect may be performed even after other results. For example, even after winning a prize as a result of the normal replay as the first replay, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on (blinks), and the first credit insertion switch 56, etc. A pseudo bet effect may be performed based on the operation of . In addition, even if the result is a predetermined small winning combination or a missing result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a pseudo-bet effect is performed based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like. may be The predetermined condition may be, for example, a case where some kind of game state transition occurs, or a case where a predetermined effect is set as a bet time effect or a start time effect. When the first credit lamp 56b is turned on or a pseudo-bet effect is performed as a result of the normal replay, it is preferable to complete the automatic insertion of virtual tokens early as in the case of the specific replay result. Specifically, even if the normal replay result is obtained, the automatic input processing may be performed in steps S2414 to S2416.

(4) In the pseudo bet effect, if the wait period has not passed, even if the start operation is performed during the bet process effect, the change to the bet corresponding effect is not performed. That is, regardless of whether or not the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started based on the start operation, the bet corresponding effect may be switched to based on the start operation during the bet process effect.

(5) In the pseudo-betting effect, if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the aspect of limiting the betting process effect is not limited to the above. For example, the betting process effect may be interrupted based on the start operation, and the betting process effect may be resumed after the start effect or the like based on the start operation is completed. In this case, the betting process effect may be restarted from the interrupted point, or the betting process effect may be restarted from the beginning. Furthermore, when the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering, the output volume of the betting sound effect may be lowered, or the brightness of the lighting rendering may be lowered.

(6) In the pseudo betting effect, if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, whether or not to limit the betting process effect is determined based on the already executed betting process effect and the remaining betting process effects. It is good also as a structure which carries out. For example, if the amount of data or execution time of the remaining betting process rendering is less than a predetermined amount, even if the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering, the betting process rendering is continued without interruption, and the rest of the betting process is continued. The betting process effect may be interrupted if the amount of data or the execution time of the effect is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. More specifically, for example, when the betting process effect corresponding to 3 bets is performed, if the start operation is performed at the timing when the betting process effect of up to 2 bets is completed, the betting process effect is not interrupted. If the start operation is performed at the timing when the betting process effect up to 1 bet is completed, the betting process effect is interrupted and switched to the betting corresponding effect for 3 bets. . Further, when the start operation is performed during the waiting time between bets, it may be configured to determine whether to interrupt or continue the betting process effect according to the progress of the waiting time. is less than a predetermined time, but may be interrupted if the waiting time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time.

(7) In the pseudo-bet effect, the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the betting process effect is interrupted, and the bet corresponding effect is switched to, and the start operation is performed during the waiting time between bets. In this case, it is configured to switch to the bet corresponding effect without waiting for the waiting time to elapse, but it may be configured to switch to the bet corresponding effect after waiting for the elapse of the waiting time. Specifically, for example, in the case of performing the betting process effect of 3 bets, during the waiting time from when the first bet display section 34a is turned on until when the second bet display section 34b is turned on. When the start operation is performed, the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c are turned on when the waiting time for turning on the second bet display portion 34b has elapsed. good too.

(8) In the pseudo-bet effect, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the process of limiting the betting process effect, the process of limiting the start effect, and other processes may be executed. good. For example, it may be configured to execute a process of counting the number of times the start operation is performed during the betting process effect. It is good also as composition which performs predetermined production. The predetermined effect may be, for example, a effect that congratulates the player on the speed of the operation, or conversely, a content that calls attention to the fact that an erroneous operation is likely to occur. There may be.

(9) In the pseudo betting effect, if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the mode of limiting the betting process effect may be changed according to the progress of the betting process effect. Specifically, when the start operation is performed at the first timing after the betting process effect is started and before the completion, the betting is handled at the first timing as the first restriction mode, for example. When switching to the effect and the start operation is performed at a second timing which is later than the first timing after the start of the betting process effect, and which is later than the first timing, the lighting effect, for example, is performed as the second restriction mode. may be continued, but the output of bet sound effects may be limited.

(10) In the replay setting process on the main controller 101 side, all the BET display sections 75 are turned off temporarily, but it is also possible to omit the turning off state. In this case, especially in the re-game setting process based on the specific re-game result win, the BET display section 75 is kept lit.

(11) In the re-game setting process based on the specific re-game win, as in the case of the normal re-game win, waiting time between bets is provided to display the first BET display section 75a, the second BET display section 75b, and the third BET display. A configuration may be adopted in which the portions 75c are sequentially turned on. In this case, the waiting time between bets in the case of winning the normal re-game result and the waiting time between bets in the case of winning the specific re-game result may be the same time or may be different. The wait time may be longer or shorter in the case of the normal replay result than in the case of the specific replay result. However, when the first credit input switch 56 is simulated to be operated based on the winning of the specific re-game result, it is preferable that the betting is completed. Configurations with shorter waiting times between bets are preferred for outcomes. In addition, in the normal re-game bet effect setting process, the waiting time between bets is not provided, and the waiting time between bets is set to be the same as the waiting time between bets in the case of a specific re-game winning prize. good too.

(12) In the specific re-game bet effect setting process, the process proceeds after the bet on the main controller 101 side is completed, but the process proceeds without waiting for the bet on the main controller 101 side to be completed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In this case, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated immediately after winning the specific regame result, the bet on the main control device 101 side is earlier than the pseudo bet effect on the display control device 81 side. It should be completed.

(13) Although the bet display section 34 and the speaker 64 on the display control device 81 side are configured to perform the pseudo bet effect, the bet display section 75 on the main control device 101 side may be configured to perform the pseudo bet effect.

(14) Although the first credit lamp 56b is configured to be controlled by the display control device 81, it may be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101. FIG. Also, the bet display unit 34 and the speaker 64 may be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 may be configured to execute processing for performing pseudo bet effects and the like.

(15) If the replay state is triggered by a specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on or a pseudo bet effect is performed. You can let

For example, as the AT mode start game, if the second replay result win or the third replay result win is established, a pseudo bet effect or the like is performed, but even if it is the AT mode start game, the first replay result win The configuration may be changed so that the pseudo-bet effect or the like is not performed when is established, and the pseudo-bet effect or the like is performed regardless of which replay result wins in the AT mode start game.

In addition, if the end game of the AT mode wins any of the replay results, a pseudo-bet effect may be performed, or a so-called RT state in which the winning probability of the replay result is improved is provided, and transition to the RT state is performed. A pseudo-bet effect or the like may be performed after a replay result of winning a prize in a game or an end game.

Furthermore, even after winning a specific replay result, a pseudo-bet effect will be made according to the number of remaining AT mode games, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of increased numbers up to the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section. If the number of remaining games in AT mode is a predetermined number or more, or if the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, or if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section In a case where the number of remaining increased coins up to the upper limit increased number is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the pseudo bet effect or the like may not be performed even after winning the specific re-game result.

(16) When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, whether or not to limit the betting process effect may be changed depending on the trigger or situation of the pseudo bet effect.

For example, as the AT mode start game, when the second replay result winning prize or the third replay result winning prize is established, the betting process effect is restricted when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect. However, even if it is an AT mode start game, if a pseudo bet effect or the like is performed based on the winning of the first replay result, even if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the bet will be made. A configuration in which the process performance is not limited may be adopted.

Further, when the start operation is performed during the betting process presentation of the pseudo-betting presentation of the end game of the AT mode, the betting process presentation is limited, but if the AT mode is in progress, the betting process presentation of the pseudo-betting presentation is being performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the betting process effect is not limited when the start operation is performed at the beginning of the game.

Furthermore, even after winning a specific replay result, a pseudo-bet effect will be made according to the number of remaining AT mode games, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of increased numbers up to the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section. When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in , whether or not to limit the betting process effect may be changed. If the number of games remaining until the number of games is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, or if the number of remaining increased numbers up to the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined number, etc., the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the betting process effect is not restricted when performed, and vice versa.

(17) Although the first credit lamp 56 is built into the first credit insertion switch 56 and the first credit insertion switch 56 itself lights up, the first credit lamp 56 is provided around the first credit insertion switch 56. Alternatively, the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 may be prompted by turning on the surroundings of the first credit insertion switch 56. By performing the prompting first state (for example, display of "PUSH") and operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the display of the first state is ended and the second state (the above "PUSU" is displayed). It is good also as a structure which switches to the state which does not perform. By turning these into the lighting state or the first state, a configuration may be adopted in which the start of a pseudo-bet effect or the like is prompted.

(18) Although the first credit lamp 56b is provided so as to prompt the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, notification means corresponding to the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion slot 45 may be provided, and the notification may be performed. When the means is in the first state, it is possible to operate the number of bets by the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion port 45, and when it is in the second state, the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion port 45 is disabled. It may be configured to notify that it is not possible. By setting these notification means to the first state, the start of a pseudo-bet effect or the like may be prompted.

(19) Although the waiting time (interval) between bets is different between the replay bet effect and the continuous bet effect, the waiting time between bets may be the same length in the replay bet effect and the continuous bet effect. The waiting time in the betting effect may be longer than the waiting time in the replay betting effect. The waiting time between bets in the pseudo bet effect is the same as the waiting time in the continuous bet effect, or the same time as the waiting time in the replay bet effect before the wait period has elapsed. It may be shorter or longer than the waiting time in the effect, and may be shorter or longer than the waiting time in the replay bet effect.

(20) Even in a replay betting effect based on a normal replay result or a betting process effect in a continuous betting effect after a small win result or a losing result, if a start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the betting process effect may be configured to limit the In particular, when a predetermined start effect (for example, pressing order notification effect) is performed based on the start operation, it is highly significant to limit the betting process effect (for example, switch to bet corresponding effect).

(21) When the pressing order notification effect and the betting process effect overlap as the starting effect based on the start operation, the configuration is such that the pressing order notification effect side or the betting process effect side is restricted, but the main control A configuration may also be adopted in which notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 on the device 101 side is also restricted.

(22) When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, and the push order notification effect is performed based on the start operation, the start of the push order notification effect is delayed. The pressing order notification effect may not be executed. For example, when the AT mode is a navigation count management type AT mode defined by the number of executions of the push order notification effect instead of the number of games, if the game does not execute the push order notification effect, the game It is preferable that the pressing order notification effect that was scheduled to be executed in .

(23) When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, and the push order notification effect is performed based on the start operation, the start of the push order notification effect is delayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of execution of the production is made different. For example, normally, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is indicated by yellow numbers as the first execution mode, but when the start operation is performed during the betting process presentation in the pseudo-bet presentation, the second execution mode is performed. Alternatively, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be indicated by purple numerals. In this case, the pushing order notification effect according to the second execution mode may be configured to be executed only when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect, or during the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect. It may be configured such that it is executed not only when the start operation is performed at 10:00 a.m., but also in other cases. As another case, for example, when the number of remaining AT mode sets is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the second execution mode may be configured so that the pressing order notification effect can be executed.

(24) Although the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is different before and after the wait period has passed, the betting process effect in the replay bet effect and the repeated bet effect can be changed according to the wait period. It is good also as a structure which makes it different before progress and after progress.

(25) In the configuration in which the betting process effects are different before and after the wait period has elapsed, not only the waiting time between bets but also other effects may be different. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of sound effect at the time of betting in the betting process production is different before and after the wait period has elapsed, or the function of the bet display section 34 is performed by the auxiliary display section 65, and the auxiliary display is performed. The display mode of the number of bets displayed in the section 65 may be configured to be different before and after the wait period has elapsed.

(26) In a configuration in which the standby state is not set in the replay state, the first credit lamp 56 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state when the second transition period during which the standby state can be set even in the replay state has passed. It is good also as a structure switched to. In this case, if the replay state is based on the specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off after the second transition period elapses.

(27) When the standby state is set, the BET display unit 75 and the gaming state display unit 76 managed by the main controller 101 side are not set to the standby state, while the BET display unit 34 and the first bet display unit managed by the display control device 81 side are not set to the standby state. The credit lamp 56b, the auxiliary display section 65, and the speaker 64 may be configured to be in a standby state, or vice versa.

(28) A lottery result of each game during a so-called RT state in which the winning probability of the replay result is improved may be defined as the replay result. In this case, the lottery result of each game in the RT state may be expressed as the specified result, and the specified result may include the first replay, the second replay, and the like. Furthermore, the RT state may be defined as a replay state.

(29) The BET display section 75 and the gaming state display section 75 may be provided at positions different from the gaming panel 25 . For example, the BET display section 75 and the game state display section 75 may be provided on the surface provided with the first credit insertion switch 56 and the effect switch 66 below the game panel 25 and intersecting with the game panel 25 . Moreover, it is good also as a structure displayed on the auxiliary|assistant display part 65. FIG. In this case, the display control device 81 may control the BET display portion 75 and the gaming state display portion 75 , and the main control device 101 may control the auxiliary display portion 65 .

(30) The first transition period until transition to the temporary standby state is set to be shorter than the second transition period until transition to the standby state, but the first transition period is longer than the second transition period. The period may be set to be long, or the first transition period and the second transition period may be set to be the same period.

(31) The replay state display section 76a is configured to remain lit even in the standby state, but may be configured to switch to the off state when the standby state or temporary standby state is entered. The ready-to-start display unit 76b and the ready-to-receive state display unit 76c are configured to switch to the off state when entering the standby state, but may be configured to switch to the off state when entering the temporary standby state, or enter the standby state A configuration may be adopted in which the light is not switched to the off state when the light is turned on.

(32) In the replay state based on the specific replay result, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the credits may be settled and the lighting state of the first credit lamp 56b may be maintained. In other words, the credit settlement and the execution of the pseudo-bet effect may be based on different settlement operations.

(33) In the replay state based on the specific replay result, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the credits are settled, a pseudo-bet effect is performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on. It is good also as composition which assumes. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b may be maintained in the lighting state without turning off the first credit lamp 56b at the start of the pseudo-bet effect, or after the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at the start of the pseudo-bet effect, The first credit lamp 56b may be switched to the lighting state after that (for example, after switching to the bet correspondence effect in the pseudo bet effect).

(34) In the continuous bet effect, the effect sound may not be output at the time of betting. In this case, the re-game betting effect may be configured such that a betting sound effect is output, and the re-game betting effect may be configured not to output a betting sound effect. Before the wait period elapses, an effect equivalent to a replay bet effect is performed, while after the wait period elapses, an effect equivalent to a repeated bet effect is performed. An effect equivalent to the game bet effect may be performed, and after the wait period has elapsed, an effect equivalent to the continuous bet effect without betting sound effects may be performed.

(35) The pseudo-bet effect based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 and the pseudo-bet effect when medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 may be different.

(36) When the betting process effect overlaps with the start effect or freeze effect, one of them is restricted. It is sufficient if the performance is performed at the time of betting based on the number operation.

(37) In the normal regame bet effect setting process, the betting process effect is advanced each time a regame bet command is received from the main control device 101. A configuration may be adopted in which the interval between bets is specified by using a timer counter or the like on the 81 side, and then the betting process effect is advanced. Further, in the replay bet effect, only the bet corresponding effect may be performed without performing the betting process effect. In this case, after the betting in the replay setting process on the main control device 101 side is completed, the display control device 81 side bet corresponding effect is performed, so that the betting is not completed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of performing the start operation.

(38) When a start operation is performed during a betting process effect, a freeze effect is generated to delay the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. A configuration may be adopted in which the start of rotation of 32M and 32R is delayed. In the freeze effect, the description has been made on the premise that the display effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, but the display effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 is not performed, and the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is simply delayed. It may be configured to be Furthermore, the period for delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be varied according to the remaining period of the betting process effect. Specifically, if the remaining period of the betting process effect is the first period. For example, the start of rotation is delayed for a first period or a period obtained by adding a predetermined period to the first period, and if the remaining period of the betting process effect is a second period longer than the first period, the start of rotation is delayed. It may be configured to delay for two periods or a period obtained by adding a predetermined period to the second period. It should be noted that the delay period may be changed according to the remaining amount of effects (remaining number of bets, remaining number of lights) instead of the remaining period of the betting process effects.

(38) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long period of time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(39) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(40) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) provided with a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

A pachinko machine has, for example, variable ball entry means capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can be entered and a closed state in which it is more difficult or impossible to enter a game ball than in the open state. A game ball entered into the variable ball entry means passes through a specific passing part in a configuration in which when the lottery is won, the variable ball entry means is opened and the round game is shifted to a win state in which the round game can be executed a plurality of times. (Occurrence of V winning), the game state after the winning state shifts to an advantageous state such as a higher probability of winning in the above-mentioned predetermined win-or-fail judgment, and the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the specific If the part is not passed (V winning does not occur), the game state after the winning state shifts to a non-advantageous state such that the winning probability of the above-mentioned predetermined win-or-fail judgment becomes lower than the above-mentioned advantageous state. It is also possible to apply each of the above inventions to nature. In this case, when the result of the passage determination whether or not the specific passage section is passed is executed during the round game in which the passage determination is performed, and in the round after the round game in which the passage determination is performed By providing a case where it is executed in the game, it is possible to increase the attention not only to the round game in which the pass judgment is performed but also to the subsequent round games by utilizing the psychology of the player who wants to know the result of the pass judgment. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when the result notification of the passage determination is performed during the round game in which the passage determination is performed, and when it is performed in the round game after the round game in which the passage determination is performed, the production By standardizing the mode or standardizing the period from the passage judgment to the execution of the result notification, whether the notification is performed across the round games depending on the effect mode and the period until the result notification. It becomes difficult to specify whether or not the vehicle has passed, and it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict the result of the passage determination.

(41) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation for setting the game bet amount;
Bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means (executing medal insertion corresponding processing, first operation corresponding processing, second operation corresponding processing, etc. by the main controller 101) function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
After performing specific notification (betting process presentation) when the bet number operation of the bet number operating means is performed, bet number correspondence announcement (bet correspondence presentation) corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation by a specific notification means (bet display unit 34) betting amount notification means (function of executing betting effect setting processing by display control device 81);
In a specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed, when the starting operation means is operated, specific processing means (specific a function of executing a process such as switching to a bet corresponding effect based on a start operation command in a replay bet effect setting process).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, a bet amount is set when a bet amount operation is performed by a bet amount operating means, and a bet corresponding to the set bet amount is issued through a specific notification. Number corresponding notification is performed. Therefore, in addition to being able to grasp the bet amount set based on the bet amount operation by the bet amount corresponding notification, it is also possible to grasp that the bet amount operation has been accepted by the specific notification, so that unnecessary bets can be made. It is possible to prevent number operations.

However, in this case, for example, the start operation means may be operated during execution of the specific notification and before the bet number corresponding notification is performed, and the rotating body may be started to rotate based on the operation. Assumed, in such a case, there is a high possibility that the effect and processing for starting rotation of the orbiting body overlap with the specific notification and the processing for specific notification, and there is concern that the processing load will increase. There is a possibility of confusion for the player due to duplication of .

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means is provided for executing the specific processing that allows the specific notification being executed to be limited. The overlap between the rotation start effect and the specific notification, and the overlap between the rotation start process and the specific notification process are eliminated, and the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be favorably avoided. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed favorably.

Feature A2. The characteristic A1, wherein the specific processing means is capable of executing a specific process for restricting execution of at least a part of the specific notification based on the operation of the starting operation means in the specific situation. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the starting operation means is operated under the specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed, the execution of at least a part of the specific notification is restricted, so the starting operation means It is possible to eliminate the overlap with the notification for start executed based on the operation of , and it is possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon that the player is confused due to the overlap of both notifications.

Feature A3. The specific notification includes a first specific notification (lighting effect by the bet display unit 34) and a second specific notification (betting sound effect).
The specific processing means restricts execution of the first specific notification out of the specific notifications and execution of the second specific notification out of the specific notifications based on the operation of the starting operation means in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the specific process can be executed so as to allow

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature A2. In particular, as a configuration for restricting at least a part of the notification, specific processing is performed so as to restrict the execution of the first specific notification and allow the execution of the second specific notification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid an increase in processing load due to restricting the execution of all specific notifications, and to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity due to stopping the specific notification that has been executed halfway. is also possible.

It should be noted that the above configuration is limited to configurations such as "the amount of data to be executed is greater for the first specific notification than for the second specific notification, or the processing load for processing for execution is greater". Therefore, the significance of restricting the execution of the first specific notification is enhanced. As a specific configuration of such a configuration, a configuration in which "the first specific notification is a predetermined display effect and the second specific notification is a predetermined sound effect" can be considered.

Conversely, when limiting the configuration such as "the second specific notification has a larger amount of data to be executed than the first specific notification or the processing load of the process to be executed is large", already It is also possible to eliminate the waste of canceling the second specific notification that has already been set. or the processing load of the already-executed processing is large”.

Feature A4. The number-of-bet notification means executes the number-of-bet notification in the same manner as when the restriction is not applied even when the specific notification is restricted by the specific processing by the specific processing means. (see, for example, FIG. 74(d)).

According to the above configuration, although the specific notification is limited based on the operation of the starting operation means, there is no need to change the aspect of the bet number-based notification regardless of the presence or absence of the limitation. This makes it possible to avoid an increase in processing load due to duplication of processing with a relatively simple configuration.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "same mode" does not mean exactly the same mode, but may be a different mode that is difficult or impossible for the player to identify.

In addition, the above-mentioned "same mode" may be expressed as "same timing", and by doing so, even the execution start timing of the notification corresponding to the number of bets does not have to be changed, further reducing the processing load. It becomes possible to plan

Feature A5. The number-of-bet notification means can execute the number-of-bet notification based on the fact that the specific notification is restricted by the specific process performed by the specific processing means (for example, FIG. 74(b) ))), the game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is restricted based on the operation of the starting operation means, it is switched to the notification corresponding to the number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a blank period in which the number of bets is unknown even though the rotation of each orbiting body has been started based on the operation of the starting operation means.

Feature A6. The specific notification includes a first specific notification (lighting effect by the bet display unit 34) by the first notification unit (BET display unit 34), and a second notification unit (speaker 64) different from the first notification unit. It is a configuration that is executed including a specific notification (sound effect when betting),
The number-of-bets notification means executes the notification corresponding to the number of bets by the first notification unit,
The specific processing means restricts execution of the first specific notification out of the specific notifications and execution of the second specific notification out of the specific notifications based on the operation of the starting operation means in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the specific processing is executed so as to permit.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to restricting the execution of all the specific notifications, and it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort due to stopping the specific notifications that have been executed halfway. is also possible. Assuming that the bet number corresponding notification is performed by the first notification unit, the first specific notification in the first notification unit is limited and switched to the bet number corresponding notification. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a blank period during which the notification unit does not notify the number of bets.

Feature A7. When the start drive control is performed by the drive control means based on the operation of the start operation means, the start notification means (display A function of executing the start-time effect setting process by the control device 81),
The specific processing means executes the specific processing when a predetermined start notification (press order notification effect) is performed by the start notification means based on the operation of the starting operation means in the specific situation, When the predetermined start notification by the notification means is not performed, or when the predetermined start notification by the start notification means and the specific notification do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the specific process from being executed (for example , see FIG. 78).

According to the above configuration, when the start notification as an effect at the start of rotation of the circulating body overlaps with the specific notification, the specific processing for limiting the specific notification is performed, but the start notification is not executed. Also, when the start notification and the specific notification do not overlap, the specific process is not executed. By adopting such a configuration, even if the specific process is for avoiding duplication of notifications, the specific process is not performed in a situation where there is no duplication of notifications in the first place. , it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load.

Feature A8. Start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses after the start drive control is started (wait time in rotation start processing by main controller 101 elapses A function that executes processing to wait for the start of rotation until
If the starting operation means is operated in the specific situation before the specific period elapses, the permitting means capable of permitting the execution of the specific notification (specific re-game bet effect setting processing by the display control device 81 A function that executes processing to prevent switching to a bet-compatible effect in the start operation during the wait period in ),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized by comprising
According to the above configuration, since the starting drive control and the starting drive control are longer than the specific period, the number of games that can be executed per unit time is limited, and the game is optimized. In such a configuration in which a specific period is set and a so-called weight is defined, when the number-of-bets corresponding notification is performed via the specific notification based on the operation of the number of bets before the specific period elapses, the starting operation is performed during the specific notification. Even if the means is operated, the execution of the starting drive control is restricted before the specific period elapses, so the rotation of the orbiting body is not started based on the operation of the starting operation means. Therefore, in such a case, the inconvenience shown in feature A1, such as overlap of the rotation start notification and processing with the specific notification and specific notification processing, does not occur, or if it occurs, the degree of inconvenience does not occur. There is a high possibility that this is low, and it is considered that there is little need to restrict specific notification. Therefore, in such a case, by providing a permitting means capable of permitting the execution of the specific notification, it is possible to avoid the restriction of the specific notification even in an unnecessary scene. , it is possible to optimize the game performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Feature A9. Start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses after the start drive control is started (wait time in rotation start processing by main controller 101 elapses function to wait for the start of rotation until
When the starting operation means is operated in the specific situation before the specific period elapses and the start drive control based on the operation of the starting operation means is executed in the specific situation , the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the specific processing can be executed so that the specific notification can be restricted when the start drive control is performed.

According to the above configuration, since the starting drive control and the starting drive control are longer than the specific period, the number of games that can be executed per unit time is limited, and the game is optimized. In such a configuration in which a specific period is set and a so-called weight is defined, when the number-of-bets corresponding notification is performed via the specific notification based on the operation of the number of bets before the specific period elapses, the starting operation is performed during the specific notification. Even if the means is operated, the execution of start drive control is restricted before the elapse of the specific period, but the start drive control based on the operation of the start operation means may be executed after the elapse of the specific period. There is a possibility that the specific notification has not yet ended at the timing when the start drive control is performed. In this regard, in the above configuration, in such a situation, the specific processing is executed so that the specific notification is restricted when the start drive control is performed. is executed, the specific notification can be restricted, and the effectiveness of the specific processing can be enhanced.

Feature A10. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the number of bets drawn by the lottery means for the replay result. re-game setting means (re-game setting processing by main controller 101) for executing re-game processing in which the same number of bets is set as the re-game state, and the lottery by the lottery means can be received again function),
When the re-game processing is performed based on a specific re-game result (specific re-game result), the bet number notification means executes the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means. , a specific bet amount notification means (function for executing a specific regame bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay process. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, when a winning of a specific re-game result is established and the re-game process is performed, the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the re-game process is sent by the bet amount operation means. It is performed based on the bet number operation. Moreover, in this case as well, since the specific notification is made before the notification corresponding to the bet amount, the notification mode is the same as when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation. becomes. By doing so, even if the result of the replay is to perform the replay process, it is possible to proceed with the game in the same flow as the game after the result of another small winning combination or the result of losing the game. For example, a specific replay result can be treated in the same way as other small combination results or losing results by using the fact that the player is given an impression that is not a replay result. It is also possible to enhance the effect of giving a certain impression, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Regarding the "replay result", it is possible to receive a lottery by the lottery means again with the same number of bets as the number of bets this time by the privilege granting means as the result of the lottery by the lottery means. The replay result for which a replay is awarded", and this point is the same for the "replay result" in other features and other feature groups.

Further, in the above configuration, the above effect can be further clarified by limiting the following small win results and losing results. This point can also be applied when clarifying the relationship between another feature or another feature group and the "replay result".

"As a lottery result by the lottery means, a small combination result (for example, a small combination result) to which a predetermined number of game values are awarded is set as a privilege by the privilege granting means,
The number-of-bets reporting means notifies the specific player based on the number-of-bets operation of the number-of-bets operation means in the next game after a predetermined number of game values are awarded by the privilege awarding means based on the result of the small winning combination. after executing the bet number corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation" configuration, and "the loss result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means,
The bet amount notification means executes the specific notification based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means in the next game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the lost result, and then performs the bet amount operation. execute the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set based on the above.

Feature A11. When the re-game processing is performed based on a predetermined re-game result (normal re-game result) different from the specific re-game result, the bet amount notification means controls the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means. Predetermined bet amount notification means capable of executing the bet amount correspondence notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay process without intervening (a function of executing the normal regame bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the peculiarity of performing the bet-number corresponding notification through the bet-number operation in the case of a specific replay result is clarified. In other words, as in the case of a predetermined replay result, normally, the bet number corresponding notification is performed without going through the bet number operation, but in the case of a specific replay result, the bet number It is clarified that the response notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the specific replay result is not a type of replay result such as a predetermined replay result, but is treated in the same way as other minor winning results or losing results. , the game can be diversified by using it. Therefore, the significance of providing the specific processing means for executing the specific processing capable of limiting the specific notification is greatly enhanced.

Feature A12. The predetermined number-of-bets informing means executes the notification corresponding to the number of bets without executing the specific notification, or executes the notification corresponding to the number of bets after executing a predetermined notification different from the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, not only the presence or absence of the bet number operation but also the notification mode until the bet number corresponding notification is performed differs between a predetermined regame result and a specific regame result. In this case, since the specific re-game result is common to other small winning combination results and loss results, the above configuration allows the specific re-game result to be similar to the predetermined re-game result. It is possible to help give the impression that the result is treated in the same way as other minor combination results or losing results, rather than replay results.

Feature A13. When the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means is performed, predetermined notification means (BET display a second bet number notification means (function for executing BET processing by the main controller 101) executed by the unit 75);
When the replay processing is performed by the replay setting unit, the second bet amount notification means performs the bet amount operation regardless of the type of replay result that triggered the replay processing. The gaming machine according to any one of features A10 to A12, characterized in that the game machine is configured to be able to notify the number of bets regardless of the number of bets.

According to the above configuration, when a replay process based on a specific replay result is performed, the notification of the bet amount corresponding to the bet amount is performed based on the bet amount operation. is performed without going through the bet operation regardless of the type of replay result. By doing so, the specific replay result is a kind of replay result, while giving the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small combination results or losing results through the bet number correspondence notification. For example, a fraudulent act that causes a replay process to be performed even though it is not a replay result, or a specific replay result is a result of another small combination or a loss result. A game hall manager or the like preferably discovers a fraudulent act of trying to enjoy the benefit of a specific replay result despite other small win results by using the impression treated the same as becomes possible.

In addition, since the number of bets is set when the replay process is carried out, for a specific regame result, an otherwise unnecessary bet number operation is performed for the purpose of effect, as in the above configuration. If the second bet number reporting means notifies the bet number without going through the bet number operation, the start operation can be performed without going through the bet number operation even after a specific replay result. It is possible to clarify that it is a composition.

Feature A14. The bet amount setting means is configured to be able to set the bet amount with a predetermined specific number as an upper limit,
The specific notification means has the specific number of notification units (bet display units 34a to 34c), and each notification unit is configured to be switchable between a notification state (lighting state) and a non-reporting state (extinguishing state). has been
The number-of-bet notification means sequentially switches the number of notification units corresponding to the number of bets set by the number-of-bet setting means to the notification state as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the state in which the notification unit is switched to the notification state is executed as the bet amount corresponding notification.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the notification corresponding to the number of bets and the specific notification. is set one by one, it is possible to clearly grasp that the bet number operation has been accepted by switching the corresponding notification unit to the notification state.

Feature A15. When performing the specific notification, the number-of-bet notification means switches a predetermined notification section to the notification state, and after a predetermined period of time (0.1 sec or 0.2 sec), switches the notification section next to the predetermined notification section to the The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that it is configured to switch to a notification state.

As in the above configuration, when the notification unit is sequentially switched to the notification state every predetermined period in the specific notification, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time depending on the number of bets. As a result, an event in which the starting operation means is operated during the specific notification is likely to occur, and the significance of providing the specific processing means of feature A1 is enhanced.

Feature A16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means provides the replay as a privilege corresponding to the replay result. It is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again in a replay state in which the same number of bets as the number of bets for which the lottery was conducted by the lottery means that resulted in the game result is set by the bet amount setting means. Replay setting means for executing replay processing (function for executing replay setting processing by main control device 101),
When the re-game processing is performed based on the special re-game results (normal replies A to C), the bet amount notification means is a special If it is a situation (for example, an AT start game), after executing the specific notification based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means, the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay process on the other hand, if the situation that resulted in the special replay result (normal replies A to C) is different from the special situation (for example, normal game state), the bet of the bet amount operating means Special bet number notification means (normal If the 2nd re-game winning result or the 3rd re-game winning result is established in Lips A to C, specific re-game bet effect setting processing will be performed, and if the 1st re-game winning result is established in normal Lips A-C The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that a function of performing a normal regame bet effect setting process is provided.

According to the above configuration, when the special re-game result is won and the re-game process is performed, the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process is the special re-game result. If the situation in which the resulting prize is established is a special situation, it is performed based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means, while if it is not a special situation, it is performed without the bet amount operation. In this case, in the case of a special situation, since the specific notification is made before the notification corresponding to the bet amount, the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation. It becomes a notification mode. By doing so, even if the result of the replay is to perform the replay process, depending on the situation, it is possible to proceed with the game in the same flow as the game after other minor wins or the result of losing. , it is possible to optimize the progress of the game, and by using the fact that the player is given an impression that is not the replay result, for example, the effect of making the player think that the special replay result is another small combination or a losing result. Also, it is possible to expect the game to be diversified by using the effect of making the player think that the other small combination or the result of losing.

Also, when the above configuration is applied to the feature A10, the feature A11, and other features citing these, the "special replay result" may be either the "specific replay result" or the "predetermined replay result". The result may be the same, or may be different from the "specific re-game result" or the "predetermined re-game result".

In addition, the above-mentioned "special re-game result" is a result of winning the "specific re-game result" and "predetermined re-game result", and in a special situation, the winning of the specific re-game result is established. In this way, if there is no special situation, winning of a predetermined replay result may be established.

Feature A17. As game states, a first game state (normal mode) and a second game state (AT mode) different from the first game state are set,
The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the special situation is a situation in which a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs.

When a special replay result wins in a situation where the game state shifts as in the above configuration, if notification corresponding to the bet amount is performed based on the bet amount operation, the transition to the second game state can be changed to the bet amount. It is possible to start from the operation, and it is possible to start the second game state with a new feeling without taking over the result of the previous first game state.

Feature A18. Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, an advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing the AT mode transition lottery process by the main controller 101) that produces an advantageous event for the player,
A first specific result (specific re-game result) and a second specific result (for example, normal re-game result) are set as the lottery result by the lottery means,
The advantageous determination means is more likely to cause the advantageous event when making the advantageous determination based on the first specified result than when making the advantageous determination based on the second specified result, or A configuration that is likely to result in the occurrence of the advantageous event,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed after the revolving body in the game with the first specific result is stopped, When the starting operation means is operated, the specific processing is executed, and when the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the revolving body rotates in the game with the second specific result. After the is stopped, even if the start operation means is operated in a specific situation where the specific notification is performed, the specific process is not executed. Features A1 to The gaming machine according to any one of A17.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first specified result tends to result in an advantageous result in an advantageous determination rather than the second specified result, after the first specified result, when the starting operation means is operated in the specific situation While the specific notification is limited, after the second identification result, the specific notification is not limited even if the starting operation means is operated in the same specific situation. By doing so, for example, the result of the advantageous judgment is notified based on the operation of the start operation means, and the more advantageous the result of the advantageous judgment, the more advantageous the game progresses. The notification is likely to be restricted in the middle, and it is possible to suitably avoid the start of rotation of the circulator during the specific notification.

Feature A19. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the bet amount operation means is operated, after executing the specific notification (betting process effect), the bet number corresponding notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is given in a predetermined manner. a bet amount notification means (function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by the notification means;
Specific processing means for executing a predetermined specific process (start of specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation where the specific notification is being executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing processing such as switching to a bet-compatible presentation based on an operation command.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when a bet amount operating means is operated, the bet amount of the game is set, and after specific notification, the bet amount corresponding to the game bet amount is handled. Notification is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the performance and processing overlap with the specific notification and the processing for the specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, and there is a possibility that the duplication of the performance etc. will cause confusion for the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing is provided. By setting it as a process for eliminating the overlap between the effect and the specific notification, and the overlap between the process for starting rotation and the process for the specific notification, the occurrence of the above various inconveniences can be preferably avoided. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed favorably.

The configurations defined in the features A1 to A18 may be applied individually to the feature A19, or may be applied in combination. Also, some of the configurations limited by features A1 to A18 may be applied, or they may be applied in combination.

Feature A20. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the bet amount operation means is operated, after executing the specific notification (betting process effect), the bet number corresponding notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is given in a predetermined manner. a bet number notification means (function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by the notification means;
When the rotation of each of the rotating bodies is started by the drive control means, the start notification means (starting effect setting processing by the display control device 81) for executing the start notification by the specific notification means or a different notification means function) and
Specific processing means (display control device) for executing specific processing capable of limiting either the specific notification or the start notification when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation where the specific notification is being performed A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of switching to a bet corresponding effect based on a start operation command in the specific re-game bet effect setting process by 81, a process of delaying the start of the pressing order notification effect, etc.). .

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when a bet amount operating means is operated, the bet amount of the game is set, and after specific notification, the bet amount corresponding to the game bet amount is handled. Notification is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the start notification and processing will overlap with the specific notification and processing for specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, and there is a possibility that players will be confused due to duplication of effects etc. .

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing that can limit the specific notification or the start notification is provided. It is possible to eliminate the overlap between the notification and the specific notification, and the overlap between the process for start notification and the process for specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed favorably.

The configurations defined in the features A1 to A18 may be applied individually to the feature A20, or may be applied in combination. Also, some of the configurations limited by features A1 to A18 may be applied, or they may be applied in combination.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A20 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features A1 to A20, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H7 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) for performing an operation for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process by the main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again in a replay state in which the same number of bets as the lottery number of the current lottery by the lottery means is set. The replay result is set,
an operation notification means (first credit lamp 56b) provided for the betting number operation means and capable of switching between a first notification state (lighting state) and a second notification state (light-out state);
a first control means (a function of executing a process of turning on the first credit lamp 56b by the display control device 81) for setting the operation notification means to the first notification state;
Second control means for switching the operation notification means to the second notification state when the operation notification means is in the first notification state. a function to execute consecutive bet effect setting processing);
When the re-game result that triggered the setting of the re-game state is a predetermined re-game result, the operation notification means is not set to the first notification state in the re-game state. Third control for setting the operation notification means to the first notification state in the replay state when the replay result that triggered the setting is a specific replay result different from the predetermined replay result means (a function of executing a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81);
The first notification state of the operation notification means set in the case of the specific replay result is maintained over a specific period, and when the specific period has passed, the operation notification means is set to the second notification state. A fourth control means (function for executing standby processing by the display control device 81) that switches to
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the bet amount of the game is set based on the operation of the bet amount operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery according to the set bet amount is performed, and the game is stopped. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is given when the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at an effective position based on the operation of the operation means, operation notification is given to the bet amount operation means. A means is provided, and when the number of bets can be set by operating the bet number operating means, the first notification state is set, and when the operation is performed in the first notification state, the first notification state is changed to the first notification state. Since it is switched to the 2 notification state, the player is notified that the operation of the bet number operation means is necessary to start the game, and that the operation is accepted when the bet number operation means is operated. becomes easier to understand.

In this case, a replay result is set as the result of the lottery so that the player can receive another lottery with the same number of bets, and there is no need to set a new number of bets after the result of the replay. However, in the above configuration, the operation notification means is not set to the first notification state in order to clarify that setting a new bet number is not required for a predetermined regame result, but if a specific regame result , the operation notification means is set to the first notification state so as to prompt the operation of the bet amount operation means. It is possible to give the player the impression of being treated the same.

However, these predetermined re-game results and specific re-game results are merely re-game results. Although it is possible to play the game at least once without doing it, it will be abandoned. In addition, when the gaming hall is closed, if it is possible to play the next day without having to set a new bet amount, it is assumed that the previous day's re-game win has been succeeded. The player will know that the set value has not been changed, and conversely, if a new bet amount needs to be set on the next day, there is a possibility that the set value has been changed. That is to be grasped by the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the first notification state is set based on a specific re-game result, the first notification state is maintained for a specific period, and the specific re-game result is the result of another minor combination. While trying to give the impression that it is treated the same as the result of losing or losing, after the specific period has passed, the state is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, so other predetermined replay results , and it is possible to clearly grasp the situation in which a replay result win has been established.

Feature B2. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a small combination result in which a predetermined number of game values are given by the privilege giving means is provided,
The lottery result obtained by the lottery means is the result of the minor combination, and after the circulation of the circular body corresponding to the result of the minor combination is stopped, the operation notification means can be placed in the first notification state. Control means (function for executing processing for turning on the first credit lamp 56b by the display control device 81);
It is possible to maintain the first notification state when the specific period elapses after the circulation of the revolving body corresponding to the small combination result is stopped and the operation notification means is placed in the first notification state. A sixth control means (a function of executing a process that does not set the temporary standby state after a small win by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, after the result of the small winning combination, the operation notification means can be brought into the first notification state as in the case of the specific replay result. On the other hand, after the specific period has elapsed, the second notification state is set in the case of a specific replay result, and the first notification state is maintained in the case of a minor combination result. By doing so, in the configuration of the characteristic B1, not only is it possible to grasp the situation in which a specific re-game result win is established, but also whether a specific re-game result win or not after the result of a minor combination is realized. It is possible to make it possible to determine whether or not there is any.

In other words, for example, when the small combination result is a stop result similar to a specific re-game result, the operation notification means can be in the first notification state regardless of the result, but the specific re-game result After that, it will be in the second notification state after the lapse of a specific period, and after the result of a similar stop roll, the second notification state will not occur even after the specific period has passed. It is possible to realize a new game feature such that the state change of the operation notification means after a specific period of time allows the user to grasp which result was obtained. By doing so, it is also possible to make use of it for improving the interest of the game.

Feature B3. Re-game notification means (game state display by main controller 101) capable of executing re-game notification that the re-game state has been set by predetermined notification means (re-game state display unit 76a) smaller than the operation notification means function to execute partial processing),
According to feature B1 or feature B2, the re-game notification means is configured to execute the re-game notification regardless of the type of the re-game result that triggered the setting of the re-game state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp that a re-game winning has been established by the re-game notification by the re-game notification means. In this way, when the replay result is a specific replay result, the replay result can be clearly grasped by confirming the replay notification without confirming the change in the notification state of the operation notification means. becomes possible. In this case, since the re-game notification is performed by the predetermined notification means smaller than the operation notification means, it is possible to confirm the re-game result, but the re-game notification is performed. is less conspicuous than the operation notification means, and is less likely to be a barrier giving the impression that a specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small combination results or losing results. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of games using a specific replay result while making it possible to confirm that the result is a replay result.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the re-game notification means can execute the re-game notification even after the specific period has passed.

According to the above configuration, after the specific period has elapsed, it is possible to confirm that the re-game winning has been established by the re-game notification rather than the change in the notification state of the operation notification means. In other words, when the re-game notification is performed after the specific period has elapsed, it is not known whether it is after a predetermined re-game result win or after a specific re-game result win. Then, for example, in a configuration in which a predetermined replay result and a specific replay result have similar stop numbers and it is difficult to determine which replay result is the specific period of time. By confirming that the operation notification means is in the first notification state before the time elapses, it becomes possible to grasp that it is a specific replay result, and the degree of attention to the operation notification means is suitable. It is also possible to increase the

Feature B5. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces production according to the progress of the game;
When a game is not played for a predetermined period after the end of one game, standby means for setting the effect means to the standby state (setting the auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 to the standby state) function to execute processing to
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the specific period is a period different in length from the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, the first notification state of the operation notification means based on a specific replay result is switched to the second notification state at a timing different from the timing at which the effect means is switched to a standby state as a so-called demo state. . By doing so, in a game in which it is attempted to determine which replay result is the result from the change in the notification state of the operation notification means, confusion that the change in the notification state has occurred due to the standby state can be prevented. It is possible to avoid. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the operation notification means is in the first notification state after the result of the small winning combination or the result of the loss, the operation notification means is in the first notification state after the result of the small winning combination or the like at the timing of switching to the standby state. may also be set to the second notification state, and in such a configuration, depending on the timing at which the operation notification means is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, whether it was a specific re-game result or a minor combination result It is also possible to realize a game feature that allows the user to determine whether the player has been

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period.

A relatively long period is generally set as the predetermined period until switching to a standby state as a so-called demo state. , as described in feature B2, it is possible to play a game in which it is determined whether it was a result of a specific replay or a result of a small winning combination.

Feature B7. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces production according to the progress of the game;
When a game is not played for a predetermined period of time after one game is finished, standby means for setting the effect means to a standby state (setting the auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 to the standby state) function to execute the processing to be performed) and
When the standby state is set by the waiting means in the replay state set based on at least the specific replay result, and when the waiting means waits after a result different from the specific replay result. It is characterized by having means (a function of executing processing for performing specific re-game winning notification by the display control device 81) that can change the state of the standby state depending on the state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to the above configuration, when the game enters the standby state, the player can clearly recognize from the state of the standby state that a specific replay result has been reached. In this case, if it is attempted to determine from the state of the standby state that the player has won a specific replay result, it is necessary to suspend the game for at least a predetermined period until the standby state. By doing so, it is possible to realize novel gameplay such as making the player look forward to the period until the waiting state by utilizing the player's eagerness to know the result quickly. Become.

Feature B8. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces production according to the progress of the game;
When a game is not played for a predetermined period of time after one game is finished, standby means for setting the effect means to a standby state (setting the auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 to the standby state) function to execute processing to
means for restricting the waiting means from entering the standby state in the replay state (a function of executing a process of disallowing the count of the standby counter in the replay state by the main control device 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, even if the operation notification means is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state after the predetermined period has passed since the replay state was set, the replay state is set to the standby state. Therefore, even if a predetermined period of time has passed, the standby state itself is restricted, or the mode of the standby state is restricted so that only a part of the production means is in the standby state, The period until the standby state is entered is limited, for example, the standby state is not entered even after a predetermined period of time elapses and then the standby state is entered. By doing so, it is possible to make the switching from the first notification state to the second notification state when the specific period has passed in the replay state more conspicuous. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify that the prize has been established.

Feature B9. A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing a virtual game value with a predetermined number as the upper limit,
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet amount set when the bet amount operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the While the specific number of bets is set, if the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operation means is operated. is a configuration that does not
The third control means controls whether the replay result that triggered the setting of the replay state is the specific replay result regardless of the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the operation notification means is set to the first notification state in the replay state if there is one.

According to the above configuration, in a replay state after a specific replay result, the operation notification means is placed in the first notification state even if the virtual game value corresponding to the specific number of bets is not stored. By doing so, when the operation notification means is set to the first notification state after a specific replay result, there is no need to grasp the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. Simplification of the configuration is achieved. In addition, although the virtual game value is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state to notify the player that the specific replay result has been won. It is also possible to let them know.

Feature B10. Virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing virtual game values up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet amount set when the bet amount operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the While the specific number of bets is set, if the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operation means is operated. is a configuration that does not
Settlement operation means (settlement switch 59) operable by the player;
When the settlement operation means is operated, a settlement means (a medal generated by the main controller 101) capable of executing settlement of game values corresponding to at least the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means function to execute return processing) and
with
When the operation notification means for settlement is operated in a state where the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on the specific replay result, the operation notification means is in the first notification state. continuation means (in the medal return processing by the main controller 101, if the third transition period has not elapsed or the settlement operation counter has not reached a specific number, the processing for settlement is not performed Accordingly, the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9 is provided with a function of not turning off the first credit lamp 56 on the display control device 81 side.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the number of game values corresponding to the virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means is cleared when the settlement operation means is operated, a specific re-game result is obtained. Even if the operation means for settlement is operated when the operation notification means is in the first notification state based on this, the first notification state is continued. Since the stored virtual game value is cleared as the game value when the settlement operation means is operated, basically the settable virtual game value is not stored even if the bet number operation means is operated. It is considered that the operation informing means is switched from the first informing state to the second informing state after the result of the small win or the result of losing. On the other hand, in a situation where the operation notification means is in the first notification state based on a specific replay result, it is possible to set the number of bets regardless of the number of stored virtual game values. , the first notification state is continued even if the settlement operation means is operated. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new game property such that a specific re-game result can be grasped by operating the settlement operation means and checking whether or not there is a change in the notification state of the bet number notification means. Become.

In the above configuration, "when the settlement operation means is operated and the number of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means is settled, the first notification With the configuration provided with the "means for switching the operation notification means that is in the state to the second notification state", it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects more preferably.

In addition, the ``settlement means'' is ``capable of paying out a number of game values corresponding to at least the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the operation means for settlement is operated. Payout means (function for executing medal return processing by main controller 101)", and the change in expression of the "settlement means" can be achieved by other feature groups using similar expressions and other features. is also applicable.

Feature B11. When the settlement operation means is operated, settlement restriction means (by the main controller 101) capable of limiting the execution of settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means Characteristic B10 characterized by having a function of not performing processing for settlement when the third transition period has not passed or the settlement operation counter has not reached a specific number in the medal return processing. game machine.

According to the above configuration, settlement of the virtual game value may be restricted by the settlement restriction means even if the settlement operation means is operated. By doing so, when the first notification state is maintained even if the settlement operation means is operated in a situation where the bet amount notification means is in the first notification state, the first notification state is maintained based on the specific replay result. It becomes difficult to understand that the 1 notification state is set. Therefore, it is possible to favorably improve the amusement of the game by operating the settlement operation means to see that the result is a specific replay.

Feature B12. The settlement restriction means can limit the execution of settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on a predetermined specific number of operations of the settlement operation means. and
The settlement means executes settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means exceeding the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, while the effect of the feature B11 is exhibited, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be settled even though the user wants to settle the virtual game value. can.

Feature B13. When the operation notification means is in the first notification state based on the specific replay result, the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means. means for setting the operation notification means to the second notification state (executing extinguishing processing of the first credit lamp 56b based on a specific settlement command from the display control device 81 when settlement of the game value corresponding to the number of game values is performed) The gaming machine according to feature B11 or feature B12, characterized by comprising a function of

According to the above configuration, the operation notification means placed in the first notification state based on the specific replay result is brought into the second notification state together with settlement of the virtual game value. By doing so, when an operation for settlement of the virtual game value is performed after a specific replay result, even though the settlement is restricted or the first notification state is continued, when the settlement is performed, , the state is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, and becomes the same as the notification state of other game results and the operation notification means. As a result, it becomes easy for only the player who has performed the settlement operation to grasp that it is a specific re-game result, and the superiority of the game that grasps that it is a specific re-game result by the settlement operation is preferably secured. It becomes possible to

Feature B14. The settlement means is capable of executing settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state. The game machine according to any one of features B10 to B13, characterized in that:

If it is possible to settle the virtual game value even in the replay state as in the above configuration, it becomes easier for the game to end in the replay state based on the specific replay result, and the feature B12. As described above, the continuation of the first notification state of the operation notification means by the settlement operation increases the significance of letting the player know that it is after a specific replay result.

Feature B15. The settlement means stores the virtual game value in the memory means when the settlement operation means is operated after a special period shorter than the specific period has elapsed since the replay state was set. The gaming machine according to feature B14, characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values that are present.

According to the above configuration, in the replay state, settlement of the virtual game value cannot be performed until the special period elapses. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the game is in the replay state.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B15 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features B1 to B15, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H7 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for performing a bet amount operation for setting a game bet amount;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means is performed (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101); ,
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
bet number notification means for executing bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set by the bet amount setting means (function for executing betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81);
The number-of-bets notification means, in a first specific situation in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (minor win result) and after the orbiting of the orbiting body corresponding to the first result has stopped, While the notification corresponding to the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets used in the lottery as the first result ends when a predetermined specific period elapses, the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the first result. A bet used in a lottery for a different second result (specific replay result) in a second specific situation after the revolving body corresponding to the second result has stopped rotating. Specific bet number notification means (temporary standby processing of bet display unit 34 in replay state by display control device 81 A game machine characterized by having a function that does not perform

According to the above configuration, the bet amount of the game is set based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and a lottery is held according to the set bet amount. , in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at an effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, corresponding to the number of bets in each game. When the result of the game is the first result, the notification corresponding to the number of bets ends when a specific period elapses after the current game ends due to the stopping of the revolving body or the granting of a privilege, If the result of the game is the second result, the game does not end even after the specific period has passed. By doing this, even though it is assumed that the result of the lottery is grasped by the stop number of the circulating body, the length of the period in which not only the circulating body's stop number but also the existing bet number corresponding notification is continued. It is possible to grasp the result of the game by making good use of It is also possible to play a game in which it is determined which result is the result. In particular, by making it possible to judge which result is obtained by the elapse of a specific period of time, it waits after the revolving body stops, which is the exact opposite of the game property of promoting smooth progress of the game and improving the interest of the game as in the past. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel game property such that the result can be determined, and such a game property can greatly contribute to improving the interest of the game.

Note that the "first specific situation" and "second specific situation" may be expressed as follows, and such changes in expression are also applicable to other features and feature groups that use corresponding expressions.

"The lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (minor combination result), and the lottery corresponding to the first result is conducted based on the operation of the starting operation means. A first specific situation after the rotation of the orbiting body has stopped or after the benefit based on the first result has been granted by the privilege granting means", "The lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (specific re-game result ), and after the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies started based on the operation of the starting operation means has stopped, or by the privilege granting means, the lottery corresponding to the second result will be held A second particular situation after a benefit based on a second result has been granted."

Feature C2. When the bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means during execution of the bet number corresponding notification by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding to the current bet number is set after finishing the bet number corresponding notification in progress. Updating means capable of executing update notification for updating to corresponding bet amount notification (in the betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet amount operations, and then bet Equipped with a function to execute processing that allows corresponding production to be performed),
The updating means is capable of executing the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the first specific situation, and the update notification is performed when the bet number operation is performed in the second specific situation. is executable and
The specified number-of-bet notification means is capable of continuing the notification corresponding to the number of bets after the specific period has passed when the update notification is performed by the updating means in the first specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to the above configuration, when the bet number operation is performed after any result, the bet number corresponding information up to that point is temporarily terminated, and then updated to the bet number corresponding information corresponding to the current bet operation. . In this case, after the bet amount operation is performed after the first result, the updated bet amount correspondence information is continued even after the specific period has passed. By doing so, waiting is the key to the game, such as discouraging the betting operation if trying to determine which result was obtained by whether or not the notification corresponding to the betting number continued after a specific period. It is possible to realize a novel game property that becomes. Also, if a new game is to be played by manipulating the number of bets, the notification corresponding to the number of bets updated by the manipulating the number of bets has a function of notifying the number of bets regardless of the result of the previous game. It becomes possible to guarantee.

Feature C3. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces production according to the progress of the game;
When a game is not played for a predetermined period longer than the specific period after the end of one game, standby means (a function of executing standby processing by the display control device 81) that puts the effect means in a standby state )and,
Means for allowing the waiting means to enter the standby state in the first specific situation, while restricting the waiting means from entering the standby state in the second specific situation (reproduction by the main controller 101) A function that executes processing that disallows counting of the standby counter in the game state),
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined period elapses after the first specific situation occurs after the game with the first result, the effect means enters a standby state, and when the specific period elapses, the notification corresponding to the number of bets ends. , even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second specific situation occurred after the game with the second result, the production means is restricted from entering the standby state, and even if the specific period of time has passed, the number of bets is increased. Correspondence notification does not end. By increasing the material for determining whether the result is the first result or the second result in this way, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game of determining both results.

Feature C4. When the bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means during execution of the bet number corresponding notification by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding to the current bet number is set after finishing the bet number corresponding notification in progress. Updating means capable of executing update notification for updating to the corresponding bet amount notification (in the betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet amount operations, and then bet Equipped with a function to execute processing that allows corresponding production to be performed),
The updating means is capable of executing the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the first specific situation, and the update notification is performed when the bet number operation is performed in the second specific situation. is executable and
The specific number-of-bet notification means is capable of continuing the notification corresponding to the number of bets after the specific period has passed when the update notification is performed by the updating means in the first specific situation. , The gaming machine according to the feature C3, wherein the bet-number correspondence notification is terminated when the standby state is entered.

According to the above configuration, when the bet number operation is performed after any result, the bet number corresponding information up to that point is temporarily terminated, and then updated to the bet number corresponding information corresponding to the current bet operation. . In this case, after the bet amount operation is performed after the first result, the updated bet amount correspondence information is continued even after the specific period has passed. By doing so, waiting is the key to the game, such as discouraging the betting operation if trying to determine which result was obtained by whether or not the notification corresponding to the betting number continued after a specific period. It is possible to realize a novel game property that becomes. Also, if a new game is to be played by manipulating the number of bets, the notification corresponding to the number of bets updated by the manipulating the number of bets has a function of notifying the number of bets regardless of the result of the previous game. It becomes possible to guarantee.

In addition, when the standby state is entered, the notification corresponding to the bet number is terminated in the first specific situation after the first result. It is sufficient to wait for a long period of time, and it is also possible to suitably relieve the player's erroneous operation.

Feature C5. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, as a privilege given by the privilege granting means, a result of a small combination in which a predetermined number of game values are given, and the same number of bets as this time, the lottery means again. A replay result that is set in a replay state in which it is possible to receive a lottery by
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the first result is a predetermined small combination result, and the second result is a predetermined replay result.

According to the above configuration, in the case of a result of a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of game values are awarded, the notification corresponding to the number of bets is made during the specific period in the first specific situation after the game resulting in the small winning combination is finished. After that, the notification corresponding to the number of bets ends. On the other hand, in the case of the replay result set to the replay state, the notification corresponding to the number of bets continues even after the specific period in the second specific situation after the game in which the replay result is finished. be done. In the case of a replay result, the next game can be played with the same number of bets as the game that resulted in the replay, but the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the game that resulted in the replay is , it can be used as it is as notification corresponding to the number of bets for the next game. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by continuing the bet number corresponding notification even after the specific period, it is possible to omit the state change of the bet number corresponding notification without causing contradiction with the progress of the game.

Feature C6. When the bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means during execution of the bet number corresponding notification by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding to the current bet number is set after finishing the bet number corresponding notification in progress. Updating means capable of executing update notification for updating to the corresponding bet amount notification (in the betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet amount operations, and then bet Equipped with a function to execute processing that allows corresponding production to be performed),
The update means, when the bet number operation of the bet number operation means is performed in the replay state set based on the replay result, updates the bet amount corresponding to the lottery resulting in the replay result. The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that after completion of the corresponding notification, it is possible to execute update notification for updating to the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay state.

According to the above configuration, when a replay result is obtained, the next game can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets of the game resulting in the replay result, and the same bet number corresponding notification itself can be diverted. Even if there is, the update notification is performed based on the bet operation. By doing so, it is possible to make the flow of the game progress the same as the game that requires bet number manipulation to set a new bet amount, such as the first result as a small win result, and the first result. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the result and the second result. Therefore, it becomes more necessary to determine the result depending on whether or not there is a change in the state of the notification corresponding to the number of bets after the specific period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C7. A predetermined re-game result and a specific re-game result are set as the re-game result,
The update means, when the re-game state is set based on the predetermined re-game result, executes the update notification without intervention of the bet number operation of the bet number operation means, while the re-game state is The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein when set based on the specific replay result, the update notification is performed through the bet number operation of the bet number operation means.

According to the above configuration, the configuration in which the update notification is performed through the bet number operation in the replay state as in the feature C6 does not apply to all replay results, but to some (specific replay results). It is a configuration that applies only to In this way, if the replay state is set, the bet amount is set as it is. By performing the update notification through the operation, it is possible to give an impression as if the replay state is not set, and it is difficult to discriminate the specific replay result from the first result as the minor combination result. can do. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the amusement of the game in which it is determined whether or not the state of the number-of-bets informing means changes with the lapse of the specific period.

Feature C8. the number-of-bet notification means executes the notification corresponding to the number-of-bets by a specific notification means;
A second bet amount notification means (main control unit) for executing a bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means by a predetermined notification means (BET display section 75) different from the specific notification means. function of executing BET processing by the device 101),
The second bet amount notification means terminates the bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount used in the lottery resulting in the first result in the first specific situation when a predetermined period elapses. On the other hand, in the second specific situation, a specific second bet number notification capable of continuing the bet number notification corresponding to the bet number used in the lottery resulting in the second result even after the predetermined period elapses. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing standby processing of the BET display section 75 by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the first result and the second result based not only on whether or not the notification corresponding to the bet amount is continued by the bet amount notification means, but also whether or not the notification of the bet amount is continued by the second bet amount notification means. can be done. By doing so, it is possible to increase the branch of judgment in the game in which the outcome is determined based on whether or not the notification corresponding to the number of bets and the notification of the number of bets is continued, and the interest in the game can be preferably enhanced.

Feature C9. The specific notification means is set to be more easily identifiable by the player than the predetermined notification means,
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which it is possible to determine the result comes earlier, depending on whether or not the notification corresponding to the number of bets is continued by the specific notification means with higher identification. By doing so, it is possible to favorably play a game in which the result is determined based on the presence or absence of continuation of the notification.

The invention described in the features C1 to C9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features C1 to C9, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H7 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
Virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing virtual game values up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
with
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet amount set when the bet amount operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the While the specific number of bets is set, if the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operation means is operated. is a configuration that does not
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
Settlement operation means (settlement switch 59) operable by the player;
When the settlement operation means is operated, a settlement means (a medal generated by the main controller 101) capable of executing settlement of game values corresponding to at least the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means function to execute return processing) and
Bet number notification means (betting effect setting by display control device 81) for executing bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set by the bet amount setting means by predetermined bet number notification means (bet display unit 34) function to perform processing) and
When the settlement operation means is operated, the specific bet number notification means (the pseudo bet effect based on the reception of the specific settlement command by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification by the predetermined bet number notification means functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the bet amount of the game is set based on the operation of the bet amount operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery according to the set bet amount is performed, and the game is stopped. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at an effective position based on the operation of the operation means, the number of bets in the game is determined by the bet number reporting means. Since it is possible to grasp the corresponding number of bets by the bet number operation means, it is possible for the player to clearly grasp that the operation of the bet amount operation means has been accepted and the current bet amount, so that the game can be favorably played. can proceed.

In the above configuration, when the operation means for settlement is operated, the number of game values corresponding to the virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means are settled. Based on the operation of the operation means, there are cases where the bet amount corresponding notification is performed by the bet amount notification means. The settlement operation means is generally operated when the game is to be terminated, but as in the above configuration, when the game is to be terminated, a predetermined bet amount notification means performs specific notification. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the game should not be ended, such as when the number of bets for the game is set. Therefore, it is possible to favorably avoid events that may be disadvantageous to the player, and to facilitate the progress of the game.

Feature D2. When the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the bet amount notification means terminates the bet amount corresponding notification that had been executed before the bet amount was set, and then the current bet amount is set. A configuration for executing the corresponding bet number corresponding notification,
When the operation means for settlement is operated, the specific bet number notification means terminates the notification corresponding to the bet number that had been executed until the operation means for settlement was operated, and then executes the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the above configuration, a new bet amount is set based on the operation of the settlement operation means, and after the settlement, the next game can be executed without further setting a new bet amount. It is possible to make an impression. By doing so, it is possible to discourage a player who intends to end the game by making a payment.

Feature D3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a replay state is set in which it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again with the same number of bets as the number of bets of this time as a privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The replay result to be played is set,
The specific bet number notification means, when the settlement operation means is operated in the re-gaming state, sets the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-gaming state as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that it is configured to execute.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the game is a replay result, a re-game state is entered in which the lottery is again received with the same number of bets as the lottery bet resulting in the replay result. When the operation means for settlement is operated in the game state, the bet amount set in the replay state is reported as the bet amount corresponding notification. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of disadvantages for the player, such as ending the game despite being set to the replay state.

Feature D4. The settlement means is capable of executing settlement of the game value corresponding to the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature D3.

As in the above configuration, in a configuration in which settlement can be made by operating the settlement operation means even in the replay state, the game is likely to be terminated without the replay state being played. In this regard, as in the above feature D3, since the specific notification is performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the game is being played again, and the possibility of the player suffering a disadvantage is reduced. be able to.

Feature D5. The settlement means settles the game value including the game value corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means when the settlement operation means is operated in a situation where the replay state is not set. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or feature D4, characterized in that it is capable of executing

According to the above configuration, when the settlement operation means is operated in a situation where the replay state is not set, the settlement including the set number of bets is performed. In this case, although notification corresponding to the bet amount is not performed by the specific bet amount notification means, if the game is to be played after settlement, it is a scene where a new bet amount needs to be set. It is unlikely that the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the strangeness of the specific notification being performed when the settlement operation means is operated is emphasized, so that the player notices that the specific notification is performed at the time of settlement. becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Feature D6. When the settlement operation means is operated, settlement restriction means (by the main controller 101) capable of limiting the execution of settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, further comprising a function of not performing settlement processing until the settlement operation counter reaches a specific number.

According to the above configuration, settlement of the virtual game value may be restricted by the settlement restriction means even if the settlement operation means is operated. By doing so, even in a configuration in which settlement including the game value corresponding to the already set bet amount is performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, the set bet amount can be dealt with. Even if the notification corresponding to the number of bets is performed as a specific notification, there is no contradiction between the notification corresponding to the number of bets and the number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to use the specific notification to support decision-making to continue the game without lowering the reliability of the specific notification.

Feature D7. The settlement restricting means can limit execution of payout of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on a predetermined specific number of operations of the settlement operation means. and
The settlement means executes settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means exceeding the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be settled even though the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means is desired to be settled, while the effect of the feature D6 is exhibited.

Feature D8. The settlement restricting means keeps the virtual game stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means at least until a predetermined period (third transition period) elapses after the end of the previous game. It is possible to limit the execution of settlement of gaming values corresponding to the number of values,
The settlement means executes settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. The gaming machine according to feature D6 or feature D7, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be settled even though the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means is desired to be settled, while the effect of the feature D6 is exhibited. In particular, by preventing settlement even if the settlement operation means is operated until a predetermined period elapses, settlement is not performed even for a player who always repeatedly hits the settlement operation means at the time of settlement. Through this, it is possible to let the player know that the game should not be ended.

Feature D9. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a replay state is set in which it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again with the same number of bets as the number of bets this time as a privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The replay result to be played is set,
When the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state set based on the replay result as the replay result, the specific bet number notification means is set in the replay state. In the re-game state set based on a predetermined re-game result different from the specific re-game result as the re-game result while executing the bet-number corresponding notification corresponding to the current bet amount as the specific notification. Characteristic features D1 to D8, characterized in that when the settlement operation means is operated, the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay state is not executed as the specific notification. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, when the result of a game is a replay result, a replay state is entered in which the lottery is retaken with the same number of bets as the lottery bet resulting in the replay result. When the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state triggered by the replay result of (1), the bet number set in the replay state is announced as the bet number corresponding notification. In this case, even if the operation means for settlement is operated in a replay state triggered by a predetermined replay result different from the specific replay result, the bet number corresponding notification is not performed. By doing so, the scene in which the notification corresponding to the bet amount is performed when the operation means for settlement is operated becomes more limited, thereby highlighting the strangeness of the notification corresponding to the bet amount, thereby enhancing the game play. easier for people to notice.

Feature D10. When the virtual game value is settled by the settlement means, settlement notification means for executing settlement notification by a predetermined notification means (function for executing the effect processing at the time of return by the display control device 81);
When the specific notification is executed by the specific bet amount notification means, the restriction means (return effect after the pseudo bet effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing restriction processing for either the specific notification or the settlement notification A function of executing processing such as outputting a sound and executing a pseudo-bet effect after settlement (Fig. 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific notification is performed when the virtual game value is settled by the settlement means, the inconvenience in processing and performance due to the overlap of the settlement notification at the time of settlement and the specific notification is eliminated. can be suitably resolved.

Feature D11. The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the settlement notification means can execute the settlement notification for a period longer than the period until the specific notification is completed.

According to the above configuration, even if the settlement notification is restricted in the configuration of the feature D10, there is still room for the settlement notification after the specific notification is completed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the duplication of the settlement notification and the specific notification to the extent that it does not lose the significance of making it easier to identify fraudulent behavior by issuing the settlement notification.

The invention described in the features D1 to D11 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features D1 to D11, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H7 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the starting operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulating bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of each of the circulating bodies. Drive control means (function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101),
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation for setting the game bet amount;
Bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means (executing medal insertion corresponding processing, first operation corresponding processing, second operation corresponding processing, etc. by the main controller 101) function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means is performed, specific notification (betting process effect) is executed, and then the bet amount corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means (bet corresponding effect) by a specific notification means (a function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81);
When the starting operation means is operated, a start notification means (a function of executing a start-time effect setting process by the display control device 81) that executes start notification by the specific notification means or a different notification means;
Specific processing means for executing specific processing capable of limiting the start notification by the start notification means (press by display control device 81) when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation where the specific notification is performed A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for delaying forward notification performance).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, the bet amount of the game is set when the bet amount operating means is operated, and after specific notification, the bet amount corresponding to the game bet amount is reported. is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the start notification and processing will overlap with the specific notification and processing for specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, and there is a possibility that players will be confused due to overlapping notifications and processing. be.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the starting operation means is operated during execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing that can limit the start notification is provided. The duplication between the start notification and the specific notification and the overlap between the process for the start notification and the process for the specific notification are eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed favorably.

Feature E2. Characteristic feature E1 characterized in that when the specific processing is performed by the specific processing means, the specific notification by the number-of-bet notification means is performed in the same notification manner as when the specific processing is not performed. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the specific processing for limiting the start notification is performed, the notification mode of the specific notification side that has already started is not changed, so there is no need for complicated processing such as changing the notification being executed midway. , it is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load.

Feature E3. The specific processing means performs the specific processing when a situation in which the start notification by the start notification means is executed based on the operation of the starting operation means is the specific situation, and the starting operation means Characteristic feature E1 is characterized in that the specific processing is not performed when the situation in which the start notification by the start notification means is executed based on the operation of is different from the specific situation. Or the gaming machine according to feature E2.

According to the above configuration, if the situation in which the start notification is actually executed based on the operation of the starting operation means is the specific situation, the specific process is performed, while the situation in which the start notification is actually executed is the specific situation If not, no specific processing is performed. By doing so, for example, even if there is a difference between the timing at which the start operation means is operated and the timing at which the start notification is performed, the start notification and the specific notification substantially overlap. can be preferably avoided.

Feature E4. Even if the operation of the starting operation means is executed in the specific situation, the specific processing means causes the start notification means to give a predetermined start notification (specific combination notification effect) based on the operation of the starting operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the specific process is not executed when is executed in a situation different from the specific situation.

By using the above configuration, when there is a gap between the operation timing of the start operation means and the execution timing of the start notification, the specific processing is not performed even in a scene where the start notification does not overlap with the specific notification. It is possible to eliminate wasteful execution of processing.

Feature E5. The start notification means is capable of executing a first start notification (push order notification effect) and a second start notification (specific combination notification effect) as the start notification,
Start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses after the start drive control is started (wait time in rotation start processing by main controller 101 elapses function to wait for the start of rotation until
When the start operation means is operated before the specific period elapses, the start notification means executes the first start notification when the start operation means is operated, and the second start operation is performed when the start operation means is operated. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein the notification is executed when the start drive control is started.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature E4, and by varying the execution timing of the start notification before and after the elapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period, it is possible to fully exhibit the function of each start notification.

Feature E6. As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of the first result can be established, and the stop operation means performs a second operation different from the first operation mode. An operation mode result (push order) is set in which a second result different from the first result can be established when operated in the mode,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation mode result, mode notification means (by display control device 81) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means function to execute the process for performing the push order notification effect),
The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the first start notification includes the mode notification by the mode notification means.

As in the above configuration, when winning an operation mode result in which the winning result differs depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode, a more cautious operation of the stop operation means is required. It is highly significant to execute mode notification before a specific period of time, a so-called wait period, has elapsed. However, even so, if there is an overlap between the number-of-bet notification and the specific notification, it should not be prioritized. It is possible to favorably avoid a sense of incongruity due to duplication of effects while prompting careful operation.

Feature E7. As the result of the operation mode, a privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the first result is established, and a privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the second result is established. Specific operation mode results (push order bells) with different benefits for the player are set,
The specific processing means comprises means capable of not executing the specific processing when the first start notification is based on the result of the specific operation mode. The gaming machine described in E6.

The significance of performing the first start operation as mode notification before the elapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period is mainly to encourage more careful operation of the stop operation means. With respect to mode notification in the case of a specific operation mode result in which the player's profit differs depending on the result of winning, the mode notification is not restricted even if it overlaps with the specific notification, so that the player's profit is favorably obtained. It becomes possible to secure

Feature E8. As the result of the operation mode, a privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the first result is established, and a privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the second result is established. Predetermined operation mode results (normal replies A to C) that have common benefits for the player are set,
The gaming machine according to feature E6 or feature E7, wherein the specific processing means executes the specific process when the first start notification is based on the result of the predetermined operation mode.

The significance of performing the first start operation as mode notification before the elapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period is mainly to encourage more careful operation of the stop operation means. Regarding mode notification in the case of a predetermined operation mode result in which the player's benefit is common regardless of the winning result, the mode notification in the case of overlapping with the specific notification is restricted so that the player is not disadvantaged. To the extent that it does not occur, it is possible to eliminate overlap between the specific notification and the start notification.

Feature E9. When the starting operation means is operated, specific drive control means for executing specific drive control for performing game effects using each of the revolving bodies over a specific period (executing rotation effect processing by main controller 101) function) and
When the starting operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed, and the specific drive control is executed by the specific drive control means based on the operation of the starting operation means, the specific notification second specific processing means for executing a second specific processing capable of limiting the A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features E1 to E8.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific drive control as the so-called freeze effect in which the game effect using the revolving body is performed is executed as the start notification based on the operation of the starting operation means, the specific drive control is the specific notification. , the specific notification side is restricted instead of the specific drive control. In general, the specific drive control as the freezing effect is generally a effect in which the expectation of a relatively big win is heightened, and by doing so, the player will pay a lot of attention. It is possible to preferably avoid that the execution of the specific drive control that is supposed to be performed is restricted due to overlap with the specific notification.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features E1 to E9, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H7 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation for setting the game bet amount;
Bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
a specific notification means (a function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) for executing a specific notification (betting process effect) corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means;
Start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses after the start drive control is started (wait time in rotation start processing by main controller 101 elapses A function that executes processing to wait for the start of rotation until
with
The specific notification means is configured such that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means after the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the specific result is stopped. If the specific situation to be performed is before the elapse of the specific period, the specific notification is set to the first notification mode, while if the specific situation is after the elapse of the specific period or the specific notification In the case of a situation where execution is performed over a specific period, the specific notification can be set to a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (specific re-game bet effect by display control device 81). In the setting process, it is a function to switch to a bet corresponding effect when the wait period elapses, perform a replay bet effect before the wait period elapses, and execute a process to perform a continuous bet effect after the elapse of the wait period). Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, the start drive control and the start drive control are executed at an interval of a specific period or more, so that it is executed per unit time The number of games that can be played is limited to optimize the games.

In such a configuration in which a so-called wait such as a specific period is defined, it is possible to set the number of bets in preparation for starting rotation and accept operation of the start operation means before the specific period elapses. Even if preparations are made before the start of rotation, the start of rotation itself is performed after a specific period of time has elapsed, and effects and the like corresponding to the start of rotation are not performed until the start of rotation.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the number of bets is set before the specific period has passed, the specific notification corresponding to the number of bets is made in the first notification mode, and the number of bets is set after the specific period has passed. When the setting is made or the specific notification is performed over a specific period, the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode. Since the notification mode of the corresponding specific notification is made different, for example, when the number of bets is set before the specific period elapses, a more flashy specific notification than usual is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by utilizing the waiting time of the wait.

Not only that, by changing the notification mode of the specific notification before and after the specific period elapses, while performing the specific notification relatively slowly before the specific period elapses, the rotation is started as the specific period elapses. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from overlapping with the effect and processing at the time of rotation start, such as by completing the specific notification relatively quickly. It is also possible to anticipate the effect of preventing player confusion by eliminating duplication of effects.

As a result of the above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably playing a game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the second notification mode is a mode in which execution of at least part of the specific notification in the first notification mode is restricted.

As in the above configuration, the mode of the specific notification after the specific period has passed or when the specific period is crossed is the mode in which the execution of at least a part of the specific notification in the first notification mode is restricted. By doing so, it is clarified that the first notification mode is more colorful and flashy than the second notification mode, and the processing load is reduced when executing in the second notification mode. It is also clarified that the overlap with the presentation at the start of rotation can be eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably exhibit the effect of the feature E1.

Feature F3. The specific notification means is
When the specific notification is performed, the specific notification is executed including the first specific notification (lighting effect) and the second specific notification (betting sound effect effect) different from the first specific notification,
The specific notification is executed with the aspect including the first specific notification and the second specific notification as the first notification aspect, and the aspect that does not include the second specific notification while including the first specific notification is the second The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the configuration is such that the specific notification is executed as the notification mode.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F2, and in particular, as a configuration for limiting at least a part of the notification, the execution of the second specific notification out of the first specific notification and the second specific notification is performed after the specific period has elapsed. By performing the specific notification in a restricted mode, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to restricting the execution of all specific notifications.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the first specific notification is a predetermined display effect, and the second specific notification is a predetermined sound effect.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F3. In particular, the display effect is more complicated to execute than the sound effect, and the amount of data to be set tends to be large. By executing the display performance as the specific notification as it is and not executing the sound performance as the second specific notification, the effect of the feature F1 can be exhibited within a range that does not cause complication of processing. As for the display effect, if the area where the display effect is executed is different, overlapping of the specific notification and the effect at the start of rotation can be allowed, but as for the sound effect, a plurality of sounds are mixed and output. It is considered that the sense of incongruity of this is great, and by doing as described above, it is possible to eliminate the overlap with the presentation at the start of rotation without discomfort.

Feature F5. The specific notification means sets the bet amount by the bet amount setting means after the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the rotation of the rotating body corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped. Means (display A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that it has a function of executing a normal replay bet effect setting process by the control device 81 .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode when the number of bets is set after the specific result and before the specific period elapses, after the specific period elapses or the specific period When crossing over, the first notification mode may be used. Thus, on the premise that the specific notification by the first notification mode may be executed regardless of the elapse of the specific period, the second notification mode differs from the second notification mode before the elapse of the specific period after the identification result. Even if the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode, it is possible to make the user accept it without any sense of incongruity.

Moreover, with the above configuration, the first notification mode is not a notification mode dedicated to the specific result, but is also executed for a predetermined result. It is possible to reduce the amount of stored data in order to change the notification mode.

Feature F6. The specific notification means sets the bet amount by the bet amount setting means after the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped. A means for executing the specific notification in the second notification mode when the situation is before the specific period elapses (function for executing continuous bet effect setting processing by the display control device 81). A gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features F1 to F5.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode when the number of bets is set after the specific period has passed after the specific result or when the specific period has passed, the specific Even before the period elapses, there are cases where the second notification mode is used. In this way, assuming that the specific notification in the second notification mode may be executed regardless of the elapse of the specific period of time, after the specific period has passed after the specific result, the Even if the specific notification is performed in the two notification modes, it is possible to make the user accept it without any sense of incongruity.

Moreover, with the above configuration, the second notification mode is not a notification mode dedicated to the specific result, but is also executed for a predetermined result. It is possible to reduce the amount of stored data in order to change the notification mode.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the second notification mode is set so that the notification period required for the specific notification is shorter than the first notification mode. .

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode, which is a relatively long notification period, before the specific period elapses and before the rotation of the orbiting body is started, and after the specific period elapses, etc. Then, when the rotation of the orbiting body is started, the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode, which is a relatively short notification period. By doing so, it is possible to provide specific information in line with the actual progress of the game.

Feature F8. The bet amount setting means is configured to be able to set the bet amount with a predetermined specific number as an upper limit,
Having a plurality of notification units (bet display units 34a to 34c),
The specific notification means is configured to perform the specific notification by switching the number of notification units corresponding to the number of bets among the plurality of notification units from a non-notification state to a notification state,
After switching a predetermined notification unit to the notification state, the waiting period until switching the next notification unit of the predetermined notification unit to the notification state is longer in the second notification mode than in the first notification mode. The gaming machine according to feature F7, which is set to be short.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F7, and as described above, if the length of the notification period is realized by varying the intervals when the plurality of notification units are sequentially set to the notification state, the first notification The mode and the second notification mode can be realized with a relatively simple configuration, and the amount of stored data can be reduced.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F8 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features F1 to F8, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H7 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation for setting the game bet amount;
Bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means (executing medal insertion corresponding processing, first operation corresponding processing, second operation corresponding processing, etc. by the main controller 101) function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A specific notification (betting process presentation) is executed when the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means is performed, and a bet number corresponding announcement (bet corresponding presentation) corresponding to the bet amount set based on the bet amount operation is performed. A bet amount notification means (function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by a specific notification means (bet display unit 34);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the number of bets drawn by the lottery means for the replay result. re-game setting means (re-game setting processing by main controller 101) for executing re-game processing in which the same number of bets is set as the re-game state, and the lottery by the lottery means can be received again function) and
with
As the bet amount operation means, a first bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) and a second bet amount operation means (medal insertion port 45, second credit insertion switch 57) are provided,
When the re-game process is performed based on a specific re-game result (specific re-game result), the specific notification can be executed in the first notification mode based on the bet amount operation of the first bet amount operating means. a first specific notification means (a function of executing a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81);
When the re-game process is performed based on the specific re-game result (specified re-game result), a second notification different from the first notification mode based on the bet amount operation of the second bet amount operating means a second specific notification means (a function of executing a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification in a mode (single bet effect);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, a bet amount is set when a bet amount operation is performed by a bet amount operating means, and a bet corresponding to the set bet amount is issued through a specific notification. Number corresponding notification is performed. Therefore, in addition to being able to grasp the bet amount set based on the bet amount operation by the bet amount corresponding notification, it is also possible to grasp that the bet amount operation has been accepted by the specific notification, so that unnecessary bets can be made. It is possible to prevent number operations.

Moreover, when a winning of a specific re-game result is established and the re-game processing is performed, the bet-number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the re-game processing is performed according to the bet-number operation of the bet-number operating means. conducted based on In this case as well, since the specific notification is made before the notification corresponding to the bet amount, the notification mode is the same as when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation. .

After that, after winning a specific replay result, the first bet number operating means among the bet number operating means is operated, and the second bet number operating means is operated. By making the notification mode of the specific notification different, it is possible to make the notification mode correspond to the normal bet number operation of each bet number operation means. Thus, even if the result of the replay is that the replay process is to be performed, the game can be progressed in the same flow as the game after the result of other minor wins or the result of losing. In addition, by using the fact that the impression given to the player is similar to that after other minor winning combinations or after losing results but different from that after replaying results, for example, a specific replay result can It is also possible to enhance the effect of giving the impression that it is treated in the same way as the result of being out, and this can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature G2. The bet amount setting means sets a first bet amount when the bet amount is manipulated by the first bet amount manipulating means, and the bet amount is set by the second bet manipulating means. In this case, a second number of bets different from the first number is set,
The first notification mode is a notification mode of the specific notification in which the notification corresponding to the first number of bets is performed,
The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the second notification mode is a notification mode of the specific notification in which the notification corresponding to the second number of bets is performed.

According to the above configuration, as a replay state after a specific replay result, even after the bet amount has already been set, by operating the first bet amount operation means, the first bet amount is set. It is possible to give an impression to the player that it is possible to set the bet amount and operate the second bet amount operating means to set the second bet amount. By doing so, it is possible to help give the impression that a specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small combination results or losing results, and it is possible to make use of this to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G3. When the specific notification of the first notification mode is executed by the first specific notification means, means for performing the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the first number of bets (by the display control device 81 a function of executing a specific replay bet effect setting process);
When the specific notification of the second notification mode is executed by the second specific notification means, means for performing the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the second number of bets (by the display control device 81 a function of executing a single bet effect setting process based on a specific insert command or a specific second operation command in a specific regame bet effect setting process;
The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first bet amount operating means and the second bet amount operating means are operated in a replay state after a specific replay result, not only the notification mode of the specific notification but also the corresponding bet amount notification is normal. It will be reported as corresponding to the number of bets at the time. By doing so, the specific notification up to the bet number corresponding notification corresponds to each bet number operating means, but the bet number corresponding notification itself is the bet number that has been set in the specific replay state. It is possible to avoid a contradiction in the production such as that it corresponds to .

Feature G4. The specific notification of the first notification mode is executed by the first specific notification means, and the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the first number of bets is performed, or the second specific notification means When the start operation means is operated in a situation where the specific notification of the second notification mode is performed and the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the second number of bets is performed, Means for switching the number-of-bet notification to the number-of-bet notification corresponding to the number of bets set in the replay state (function of executing processing for performing a bet-corresponding effect in the pseudo-bet effect by the display control device 81, (see FIG. 85(c))).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the bet amount has already been set as a replay state, it is possible to perform a pseudo-bet amount correspondence notification corresponding to the operation of each bet amount operating means, while at the same time the start operation is performed. When the means is operated, by switching to the notification corresponding to the bet number corresponding to the bet number set as the replay state, even though the revolving body has started to rotate, this time It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player cannot grasp the number of bets provided by the lottery means.

Feature G5. In a situation where the specific notification of the first notification mode is performed by the first specific notification means, or in a situation where the specific notification of the second notification mode is performed by the second specific notification means, When the starting operation means is operated, the means for switching the number-of-bet notification to the number-of-bet notification corresponding to the number of bets set in the replay state The gaming machine according to feature G3 or feature G4, characterized by having a function of executing a process of switching to bet corresponding presentation during process presentation (see FIG. 85(c)).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the bet amount has already been set as a replay state, it is possible to perform a pseudo-bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the operation of each bet amount operation means, When the starting operation means is operated before reaching the actual bet number correspondence notification, switching to the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set as the replay state is performed. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player cannot grasp the number of bets provided by the current lottery means even though the rotation has started.

Feature G6. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification including a first specific notification (lighting effect) and a second specific notification (betting sound effect effect) different from the first specific notification as the specific notification. can be,
The specific notification in the first notification mode by the first specific notification means includes the first specific notification and the second specific notification, while in the second notification mode by the second specific notification means The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the specific notification does not include the first specific notification but includes the second specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the first notification mode and the second notification mode is whether or not the first specific notification is included. It is possible to expect excellent effects of the feature G1 with a relatively simple configuration such as making them different.

Feature G7. game value input means (medal input port 45) for inputting game value by a player;
game value input grasping means (inserted medal detection sensor 45a) for grasping that a game value has been inserted into the game value inserting means;
with
Any one of the characteristics G1 to G6, wherein the gaming value input grasping means grasps that the bet amount operation by the second bet amount manipulating means is executed when it grasps that the gaming value has been inserted. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, in the replay state set based on the specific replay result, when the player inserts the game value, the second Specific notification in the notification mode is executed. In other words, even in a replay state based on a specific replay result, it is possible to insert a game value, and furthermore, by treating it as if it were possible to set the number of bets by inserting the game value, This can help give the player an impression that a specific replay result is equivalent to other minor win results.

Feature G8. A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing a virtual game value with a predetermined number as the upper limit,
When the first number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet number set when the first bet amount operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the first bet amount operation means is operated. A configuration in which the first number of bets is set based on the operation,
The second specific notification means, when the re-game processing is performed based on the specific re-game result, the virtual The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that it is possible to increase the number of stored game values and execute the specific notification in the second notification mode.

According to the above configuration, in the replay state based on the specific replay result, when the game value is inserted from the game value input means, not only is the specific notification by the pseudo second notification mode performed, but also the virtual game value It is possible to increase the number of items stored in the storage means. By doing so, it is possible to set the number of bets by inserting a virtual game value in a specific replay state, but the game value is not spent due to such a pseudo specific notification. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged such as being forced to play.

Feature G9. The bet amount set by the bet amount operation by the second bet amount operating means may be different from the bet amount set in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-gaming result,
The second specific notification means, when the re-game process is performed based on the specific re-game result, is configured to perform the specific game in the second notification mode based on the bet amount operation by the second bet amount operation means. In addition to executing the notification, the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay process is executed (the bet corresponding effect is executed based on the specific input command in the specific regame bet effect setting process by the display control device 81). (see FIG. 85(d)), and when the bet number operation is performed by the second bet amount operation means in a situation where the bet number corresponding information is being executed, The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined notification (credit increase sound effect, FIG. 85(a)) without updating the notification corresponding to the number of bets. .

According to the above configuration, when a bet amount operation is performed by the second bet amount operating means in a replay state based on a specific replay result, the specific notification is made according to the second notification mode and the corresponding bet amount notification is performed. Furthermore, when the bet number is manipulated by the second bet number operating means, only the predetermined notification is made without updating the bet number corresponding notification. In this way, in a replay state based on a specific replay result, along with the specific notification by the bet number manipulation of the second bet number manipulation means, the replay is made instead of the bet number by the bet number manipulation of the second bet number manipulation means. By performing the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the game state, it is possible to clearly grasp that the bet amount operation by the second bet amount operation means has been accepted, and the bet amount operation is accepted. It is also possible to grasp the number of bets. In addition, when the bet number operation is performed again by the second bet amount operation means, if the bet number corresponding notification is not updated, the impression that the bet number corresponding notification is legitimate is given. can be strengthened, and since a predetermined notification is also given at the time of the bet operation, it is possible to let the player know that the bet operation has been accepted even if the bet operation is not performed. Therefore, when the bet amount set by the bet amount operation of the second bet amount operation means is different from the bet amount in the replay state, contradiction and inconvenience of notification of the bet amount operation by the second bet amount operation means are preferably avoided. can be resolved.

The invention described in the features G1 to G9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features G1 to G9, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H7 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the starting operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulating bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of each of the circulating bodies. Drive control means (function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101),
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main controller 101) for giving a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A specific notification means (for performing a betting process effect, etc. in the betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification (betting time effect such as a betting process effect) when the betting number operation means is operated. function to perform processing) and
Bet number notification means for executing a bet number correspondence notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet amount setting means by a predetermined notification means (betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81 is executed) function) and
In a specific situation where the specific notification is being executed, when the starting operation means is operated, a specific means capable of limiting the execution of the start drive control based on the operation of the starting operation means (freeze by main controller 101 a function of setting a second freeze flag when a start operation is performed during a betting process effect in a replay state based on a specific replay result in a lottery process.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when a bet number operating means is operated, the game bet number is set, a specific notification is executed, and a game bet number corresponding to the game bet number is set. A predetermined notification means is used to notify the number of bets. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. Execution of start drive control is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the specific notification and the start of rotation of the orbiting body are overlapped, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to duplication of effects and processes.

Feature H2. Specific drive control means capable of executing specific drive control so as to perform a specific action (second freeze effect) as a game effect using the revolving body (executing the second freeze effect in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101 function),
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific drive control means can execute the specific drive control when execution of the start drive control is restricted by the specific means.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification and the start of rotation of the revolving body overlap, a specific action as a game effect using the revolving body, such as a so-called freeze effect, is executed. By using such a specific action, even if the specific notification and the start of rotation of the orbiting body overlap, it is possible to accept the situation without any sense of incongruity. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the body, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, to the above configuration, a configuration may be added such that "the drive control means can execute the start drive control after the specific drive control by the specific drive control means is completed."

Feature H3. An execution lottery means (a function of executing a freeze lottery process by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery for executing the specific drive control by the specific drive control means based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
The specifying means can cause the specific drive control to be performed even if the result of the execution lottery by the execution lottery means is different from the result corresponding to the execution of the specific drive control. The gaming machine according to feature H2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the execution lottery for the specific action is performed based on the lottery result of the lottery means, even if the execution lottery for the specific action is not won, the specific notification and the start of rotation of the rotating body overlap. When doing so, it is possible to cause a specific action to be performed. By doing so, it is made clear that the specific operation is not performed by chance when the specific notification and the start of rotation overlap.

Feature H4. Advantageous determination means (function for executing AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means,
The advantageous determination means makes the advantageous determination when the lottery result of the lottery means is a first result (specific combination) than when a second result (normal combination) different from the first result is obtained. The advantageous determination is performed so that the result of is likely to be a result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
The execution lottery means corresponds to executing the specific drive control when the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result rather than the second result. The gaming machine according to feature H3, characterized in that the execution lottery is executed so as to easily result in winning.

According to the above configuration, the execution rate of the specific action and the occurrence rate of the advantageous event are clearly related. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific action by utilizing the player's psychology of expecting an advantageous event. When an action is performed, it can be made to accept it without a sense of incongruity, and it can be made to pay attention with a great sense of anticipation.

Feature H5. The specific notification means is configured to end the specific notification before the specific drive control by the specific drive control means ends (see FIG. 83(d)). The game machine according to any one of H2 to H4.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification ends before the specific action ends, the start drive control and the specific notification overlap even though the specific action is performed by restricting the start drive control. It is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience of not being resolved.

Feature H6. The specific drive control means stops the rotating body and delays the start of rotation of the rotating body by the start drive control when execution of the start drive control is restricted by the specifying means. The game machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, wherein the specific drive control is executed so as to perform an action.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the rotating body does not rotate in the specific operation. By doing so, the specific notification and the operation of the circulating body do not overlap, and it is possible to prevent inconveniences due to overlap of processing.

Feature H7. A first specific drive control means capable of executing a first specific drive control so as to perform a first specific action (first freeze effect) as a game effect including the rotation of the revolving body (rotation effect processing by the main controller 101) function to execute the first freeze effect) and
Second specific drive control means (rotation effect processing by main controller 101) capable of executing second specific drive control so as to perform a second specific action (second freeze effect) as a game action that does not include the rotation of the revolving body function to execute the second freeze effect),
with
In the specific situation, when the starting operation means is operated and the first specific drive control is performed by the first specific drive control means based on the operation of the starting operation means, the specific notification can be restricted. specific limiting means for executing such limiting processing (function for executing processing for switching the betting process effect to bet corresponding effect based on the first freeze command in the specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the first specific action including the rotation of the circulator and the specific notification overlap, the specific notification side is restricted. In this way, the configuration is such that priority is given to the first specific action by the rotation of the revolving body, instead of preventing the specific notification based on the operation of the betting operation means until the rotation of the revolving body is stopped. In addition, it is possible to suppress a high load on the drive unit due to sudden changes in drive control of the rotating body.

The invention described in the features H1 to H7 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. is performed, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When operated, an internal lottery is carried out and rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

For each configuration of the features H1 to H7, features A1 to A20, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F8, features G1 to G9, features H1 to It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one configuration of H7 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of the respective technical ideas. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature H group to each configuration of the feature group A to feature group H detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means for performing a start operation for starting orbiting each of the orbiting bodies;
a stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. drive control means for executing
a bet amount operation means for performing a bet amount operation for setting a game bet amount;
bet amount setting means for setting a game bet amount based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for awarding a privilege to a player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
A bet amount for which a specific notification is performed when the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means is performed, and a bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set based on the bet amount operation is performed by the specific notification means. a notification means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the number of bets drawn by the lottery means for the replay result. re-game setting means for executing a re-game process in which the player can again receive a lottery by the lottery means in a re-game state in which the same number of bets is set;
with
a first bet amount operating means and a second bet amount operating means as the bet amount operating means;
First specific notification means capable of executing the specific notification in a first notification mode based on the bet amount operation of the first bet amount operation means when the re-game processing is performed based on a specific re-game result and,
When the re-game processing is performed based on the specific re-game result, the specific notification is performed in a second notification mode different from the first notification mode based on the bet amount operation of the second bet amount operation means. a second specific notification means capable of executing
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images